[MIPS] Implement O32 FPXX, FP64 and FP64A ABI extensions
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gas / doc / as.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*-Texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 @c UPDATE!! On future updates--
4 @c (1) check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
5 @c md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
6 @c (2) for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
7 @c in config/tc-*.c
8 @c (3) for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
9 @c in config/obj-*.c
10 @c (4) portable directives in potable[] in read.c
11 @c %**start of header
12 @setfilename as.info
13 @c ---config---
14 @macro gcctabopt{body}
15 @code{\body\}
16 @end macro
17 @c defaults, config file may override:
18 @set have-stabs
19 @c ---
20 @c man begin NAME
21 @c ---
22 @include asconfig.texi
23 @include bfdver.texi
24 @c ---
25 @c man end
26 @c ---
27 @c common OR combinations of conditions
28 @ifset COFF
29 @set COFF-ELF
30 @end ifset
31 @ifset ELF
32 @set COFF-ELF
33 @end ifset
34 @ifset AOUT
35 @set aout-bout
36 @end ifset
37 @ifset ARM/Thumb
38 @set ARM
39 @end ifset
40 @ifset Blackfin
41 @set Blackfin
42 @end ifset
43 @ifset BOUT
44 @set aout-bout
45 @end ifset
46 @ifset H8/300
47 @set H8
48 @end ifset
49 @ifset SH
50 @set H8
51 @end ifset
52 @ifset HPPA
53 @set abnormal-separator
54 @end ifset
55 @c ------------
56 @ifset GENERIC
57 @settitle Using @value{AS}
58 @end ifset
59 @ifclear GENERIC
60 @settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
61 @end ifclear
62 @setchapternewpage odd
63 @c %**end of header
64
65 @c @smallbook
66 @c @set SMALL
67 @c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
68 @c instructions. Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
69 @c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
70 @c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
71 @c
72 @c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
73 @c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
74 @c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
75 @c break.
76 @c
77 @c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
78 @c not well for the default large-page format. This manual expects that if you
79 @c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
80 @c tables in question. You can turn on one without the other at your
81 @c discretion, of course.
82 @ifinfo
83 @set SMALL
84 @c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
85 @c might as well show 'em anyways.
86 @end ifinfo
87
88 @ifnottex
89 @dircategory Software development
90 @direntry
91 * As: (as). The GNU assembler.
92 * Gas: (as). The GNU assembler.
93 @end direntry
94 @end ifnottex
95
96 @finalout
97 @syncodeindex ky cp
98
99 @copying
100 This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
101
102 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
103 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
104
105 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
106 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
107 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
108 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
109 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
110 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
111
112 @c man end
113 @end copying
114
115 @titlepage
116 @title Using @value{AS}
117 @subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
118 @ifclear GENERIC
119 @subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
120 @end ifclear
121 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
122 @sp 1
123 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
124 @end ifset
125 @sp 1
126 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
127 @sp 1
128 @sp 13
129 The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
130 Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
131 first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
132 The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
133 distracting the boss while they got some work
134 done.
135 @sp 3
136 @author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
137 @page
138 @tex
139 {\parskip=0pt
140 \hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
141 \hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
142 }
143 %"boxit" macro for figures:
144 %Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
145 \gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
146 \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
147 #2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
148 \gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
149 @end tex
150
151 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
152 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
153
154 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
155 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
156 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
157 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
158 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
159 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
160
161 @end titlepage
162 @contents
163
164 @ifnottex
165 @node Top
166 @top Using @value{AS}
167
168 This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
169 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
170 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
171 @end ifset
172 version @value{VERSION}.
173 @ifclear GENERIC
174 This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
175 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
176 @end ifclear
177
178 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
179 Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
180 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
181
182 @menu
183 * Overview:: Overview
184 * Invoking:: Command-Line Options
185 * Syntax:: Syntax
186 * Sections:: Sections and Relocation
187 * Symbols:: Symbols
188 * Expressions:: Expressions
189 * Pseudo Ops:: Assembler Directives
190 @ifset ELF
191 * Object Attributes:: Object Attributes
192 @end ifset
193 * Machine Dependencies:: Machine Dependent Features
194 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
195 * Acknowledgements:: Who Did What
196 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
197 * AS Index:: AS Index
198 @end menu
199 @end ifnottex
200
201 @node Overview
202 @chapter Overview
203 @iftex
204 This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
205 @ifclear GENERIC
206 This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
207 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
208 @end ifclear
209 @end iftex
210
211 @cindex invocation summary
212 @cindex option summary
213 @cindex summary of options
214 Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. For details,
215 see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
216
217 @c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
218
219 @ignore
220 @c man begin SEEALSO
221 gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
222 @c man end
223 @end ignore
224
225 @c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
226 @c to be limited to one line for the header.
227 @smallexample
228 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
229 @value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
230 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}] [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
231 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
232 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
233 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--gdwarf-sections}]
234 [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
235 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
236 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
237 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}] [@b{-o}
238 @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}] [@b{--statistics}]
239 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}] [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}]
240 [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}] [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
241 [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
242 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
243 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
244 @c
245 @c Target dependent options are listed below. Keep the list sorted.
246 @c Add an empty line for separation.
247 @ifset AARCH64
248
249 @emph{Target AArch64 options:}
250 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
251 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
252 @end ifset
253 @ifset ALPHA
254
255 @emph{Target Alpha options:}
256 [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
257 [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
258 [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
259 [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
260 [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
261 @end ifset
262 @ifset ARC
263
264 @emph{Target ARC options:}
265 [@b{-marc[5|6|7|8]}]
266 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
267 @end ifset
268 @ifset ARM
269
270 @emph{Target ARM options:}
271 @c Don't document the deprecated options
272 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
273 [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
274 [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
275 [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
276 [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
277 [@b{-mthumb}]
278 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
279 [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
280 @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
281 [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
282 @end ifset
283 @ifset Blackfin
284
285 @emph{Target Blackfin options:}
286 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
287 [@b{-mfdpic}]
288 [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
289 [@b{-mnopic}]
290 @end ifset
291 @ifset CRIS
292
293 @emph{Target CRIS options:}
294 [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
295 [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
296 [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
297 [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
298 @c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
299 @c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
300 @end ifset
301 @ifset D10V
302
303 @emph{Target D10V options:}
304 [@b{-O}]
305 @end ifset
306 @ifset D30V
307
308 @emph{Target D30V options:}
309 [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
310 @end ifset
311 @ifset EPIPHANY
312
313 @emph{Target EPIPHANY options:}
314 [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}]
315 @end ifset
316 @ifset H8
317
318 @emph{Target H8/300 options:}
319 [-h-tick-hex]
320 @end ifset
321 @ifset HPPA
322 @c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
323 @end ifset
324 @ifset I80386
325
326 @emph{Target i386 options:}
327 [@b{--32}|@b{--x32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
328 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
329 @end ifset
330 @ifset I960
331
332 @emph{Target i960 options:}
333 @c see md_parse_option in tc-i960.c
334 [@b{-ACA}|@b{-ACA_A}|@b{-ACB}|@b{-ACC}|@b{-AKA}|@b{-AKB}|
335 @b{-AKC}|@b{-AMC}]
336 [@b{-b}] [@b{-no-relax}]
337 @end ifset
338 @ifset IA64
339
340 @emph{Target IA-64 options:}
341 [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
342 [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
343 [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
344 [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
345 [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
346 [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
347 [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
348 @end ifset
349 @ifset IP2K
350
351 @emph{Target IP2K options:}
352 [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
353 @end ifset
354 @ifset M32C
355
356 @emph{Target M32C options:}
357 [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
358 @end ifset
359 @ifset M32R
360
361 @emph{Target M32R options:}
362 [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
363 @b{--W[n]p}]
364 @end ifset
365 @ifset M680X0
366
367 @emph{Target M680X0 options:}
368 [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
369 @end ifset
370 @ifset M68HC11
371
372 @emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
373 [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}|@b{-mm9s12x}|@b{-mm9s12xg}]
374 [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
375 [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
376 [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
377 [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
378 [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
379 @end ifset
380 @ifset MCORE
381
382 @emph{Target MCORE options:}
383 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
384 [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
385 @end ifset
386 @ifset METAG
387
388 @emph{Target Meta options:}
389 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mfpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mdsp=@var{cpu}}]
390 @end ifset
391 @ifset MICROBLAZE
392 @emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
393 @c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
394 @end ifset
395 @ifset MIPS
396
397 @emph{Target MIPS options:}
398 [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
399 [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
400 [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
401 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
402 [@b{-mfp64}] [@b{-mgp64}] [@b{-mfpxx}]
403 [@b{-modd-spreg}] [@b{-mno-odd-spreg}]
404 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
405 [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
406 [@b{-mips32r3}] [@b{-mips32r5}] [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
407 [@b{-mips64r3}] [@b{-mips64r5}]
408 [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
409 [@b{-mnan=@var{encoding}}]
410 [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
411 [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
412 [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}]
413 [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
414 [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
415 [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
416 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
417 [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
418 [@b{-mmsa}] [@b{-mno-msa}]
419 [@b{-mxpa}] [@b{-mno-xpa}]
420 [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
421 [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}]
422 [@b{-minsn32}] [@b{-mno-insn32}]
423 [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
424 [@b{-mfix-rm7000}] [@b{-mno-fix-rm7000}]
425 [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
426 [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
427 [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
428 [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
429 @end ifset
430 @ifset MMIX
431
432 @emph{Target MMIX options:}
433 [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
434 [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
435 [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
436 [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
437 @end ifset
438 @ifset NIOSII
439
440 @emph{Target Nios II options:}
441 [@b{-relax-all}] [@b{-relax-section}] [@b{-no-relax}]
442 [@b{-EB}] [@b{-EL}]
443 @end ifset
444 @ifset NDS32
445
446 @emph{Target NDS32 options:}
447 [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}] [@b{-Os}] [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
448 [@b{-misa=@var{isa}}] [@b{-mabi=@var{abi}}] [@b{-mall-ext}]
449 [@b{-m[no-]16-bit}] [@b{-m[no-]perf-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]perf2-ext}]
450 [@b{-m[no-]string-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]dsp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]mac}] [@b{-m[no-]div}]
451 [@b{-m[no-]audio-isa-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-sp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-dp-ext}]
452 [@b{-m[no-]fpu-fma}] [@b{-mfpu-freg=@var{FREG}}] [@b{-mreduced-regs}]
453 [@b{-mfull-regs}] [@b{-m[no-]dx-regs}] [@b{-mpic}] [@b{-mno-relax}]
454 [@b{-mb2bb}]
455 @end ifset
456 @ifset PDP11
457
458 @emph{Target PDP11 options:}
459 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
460 [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
461 [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
462 @end ifset
463 @ifset PJ
464
465 @emph{Target picoJava options:}
466 [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
467 @end ifset
468 @ifset PPC
469
470 @emph{Target PowerPC options:}
471 [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
472 [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
473 @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mppc64}|
474 @b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|@b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|
475 @b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpwr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|@b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|
476 @b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpwr7}|@b{-mpower8}|@b{-mpwr8}|@b{-ma2}|@b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}]
477 [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}|@b{-mhtm}|@b{-mvle}]
478 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
479 [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
480 [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
481 [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
482 [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
483 @end ifset
484 @ifset RL78
485
486 @emph{Target RL78 options:}
487 [@b{-mg10}]
488 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
489 @end ifset
490 @ifset RX
491
492 @emph{Target RX options:}
493 [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
494 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
495 [@b{-muse-conventional-section-names}]
496 [@b{-msmall-data-limit}]
497 [@b{-mpid}]
498 [@b{-mrelax}]
499 [@b{-mint-register=@var{number}}]
500 [@b{-mgcc-abi}|@b{-mrx-abi}]
501 @end ifset
502 @ifset S390
503
504 @emph{Target s390 options:}
505 [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
506 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
507 [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
508 @end ifset
509 @ifset SCORE
510
511 @emph{Target SCORE options:}
512 [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
513 [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
514 [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
515 [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
516 @end ifset
517 @ifset SPARC
518
519 @emph{Target SPARC options:}
520 @c The order here is important. See c-sparc.texi.
521 [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
522 @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}]
523 [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}] [@b{-bump}]
524 [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
525 @end ifset
526 @ifset TIC54X
527
528 @emph{Target TIC54X options:}
529 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
530 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
531 @end ifset
532
533 @ifset TIC6X
534
535 @emph{Target TIC6X options:}
536 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
537 [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
538 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
539 @end ifset
540 @ifset TILEGX
541
542 @emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
543 [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}]
544 @end ifset
545 @ifset TILEPRO
546 @c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
547 @end ifset
548
549 @ifset XTENSA
550
551 @emph{Target Xtensa options:}
552 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
553 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
554 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
555 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
556 [@b{--[no-]trampolines}]
557 @end ifset
558
559 @ifset Z80
560
561 @emph{Target Z80 options:}
562 [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}]
563 [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}]
564 [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}]
565 [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}]
566 [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}]
567 [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}]
568 [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}]
569 @end ifset
570
571 @ifset Z8000
572 @c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
573 @end ifset
574
575 @c man end
576 @end smallexample
577
578 @c man begin OPTIONS
579
580 @table @gcctabopt
581 @include at-file.texi
582
583 @item -a[cdghlmns]
584 Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
585
586 @table @gcctabopt
587 @item -ac
588 omit false conditionals
589
590 @item -ad
591 omit debugging directives
592
593 @item -ag
594 include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
595
596 @item -ah
597 include high-level source
598
599 @item -al
600 include assembly
601
602 @item -am
603 include macro expansions
604
605 @item -an
606 omit forms processing
607
608 @item -as
609 include symbols
610
611 @item =file
612 set the name of the listing file
613 @end table
614
615 You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
616 listing without forms processing. The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
617 the last one. By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
618
619 @item --alternate
620 Begin in alternate macro mode.
621 @ifclear man
622 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
623 @end ifclear
624
625 @item --compress-debug-sections
626 Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib. The debug sections are renamed
627 to begin with @samp{.zdebug}, and the resulting object file may not be
628 compatible with older linkers and object file utilities.
629
630 @item --nocompress-debug-sections
631 Do not compress DWARF debug sections. This is the default.
632
633 @item -D
634 Ignored. This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
635 other assemblers.
636
637 @item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
638 When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
639 information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
640
641 @item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
642 Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
643 @var{value} must be an integer constant. As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
644 indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
645 value. The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
646 use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
647
648 @item -f
649 ``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
650 compiler output).
651
652 @item -g
653 @itemx --gen-debug
654 Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
655 debug format is preferred by the target. This currently means either STABS,
656 ECOFF or DWARF2.
657
658 @item --gstabs
659 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line. This
660 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
661
662 @item --gstabs+
663 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
664 extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
665 debuggers crash or refuse to read your program. This
666 may help debugging assembler code. Currently the only GNU extension is
667 the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
668
669 @item --gdwarf-2
670 Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line. This
671 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. Note---this
672 option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
673
674 @item --gdwarf-sections
675 Instead of creating a .debug_line section, create a series of
676 .debug_line.@var{foo} sections where @var{foo} is the name of the
677 corresponding code section. For example a code section called @var{.text.func}
678 will have its dwarf line number information placed into a section called
679 @var{.debug_line.text.func}. If the code section is just called @var{.text}
680 then debug line section will still be called just @var{.debug_line} without any
681 suffix.
682
683 @item --size-check=error
684 @itemx --size-check=warning
685 Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
686
687 @item --help
688 Print a summary of the command line options and exit.
689
690 @item --target-help
691 Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
692
693 @item -I @var{dir}
694 Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
695
696 @item -J
697 Don't warn about signed overflow.
698
699 @item -K
700 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
701 This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
702 @end ifclear
703 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
704 Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
705 @end ifset
706
707 @item -L
708 @itemx --keep-locals
709 Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols. These symbols start with
710 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
711 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
712 @ifclear man
713 @xref{Symbol Names}.
714 @end ifclear
715
716 @item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
717 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
718 listing to @var{number}.
719
720 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
721 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
722 lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
723
724 @item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
725 Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
726 @var{number} bytes.
727
728 @item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
729 Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
730 to @var{number} + 1.
731
732 @item -o @var{objfile}
733 Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
734
735 @item -R
736 Fold the data section into the text section.
737
738 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
739 Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to
740 @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the
741 assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's
742 memory requirements. Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory
743 requirements at the expense of speed.
744
745 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
746 This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the
747 assembly processes slower. Currently this switch is a synonym for
748 @samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well.
749
750 @item --statistics
751 Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
752 assembly.
753
754 @item --strip-local-absolute
755 Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
756
757 @item -v
758 @itemx -version
759 Print the @command{as} version.
760
761 @item --version
762 Print the @command{as} version and exit.
763
764 @item -W
765 @itemx --no-warn
766 Suppress warning messages.
767
768 @item --fatal-warnings
769 Treat warnings as errors.
770
771 @item --warn
772 Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
773
774 @item -w
775 Ignored.
776
777 @item -x
778 Ignored.
779
780 @item -Z
781 Generate an object file even after errors.
782
783 @item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
784 Standard input, or source files to assemble.
785
786 @end table
787 @c man end
788
789 @ifset AARCH64
790
791 @ifclear man
792 @xref{AArch64 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
793 for the 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
794 @end ifclear
795
796 @ifset man
797 @c man begin OPTIONS
798 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
799 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
800 @c man end
801 @c man begin INCLUDE
802 @include c-aarch64.texi
803 @c ended inside the included file
804 @end ifset
805
806 @end ifset
807
808 @ifset ALPHA
809
810 @ifclear man
811 @xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
812 for an Alpha processor.
813 @end ifclear
814
815 @ifset man
816 @c man begin OPTIONS
817 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
818 processor.
819 @c man end
820 @c man begin INCLUDE
821 @include c-alpha.texi
822 @c ended inside the included file
823 @end ifset
824
825 @end ifset
826
827 @c man begin OPTIONS
828 @ifset ARC
829 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
830 an ARC processor.
831
832 @table @gcctabopt
833 @item -marc[5|6|7|8]
834 This option selects the core processor variant.
835 @item -EB | -EL
836 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
837 @end table
838 @end ifset
839
840 @ifset ARM
841 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
842 processor family.
843
844 @table @gcctabopt
845 @item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
846 Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
847 @item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
848 Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
849 @item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
850 Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
851 @item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
852 Select which floating point ABI is in use.
853 @item -mthumb
854 Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
855 @item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
856 Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
857 @item -EB | -EL
858 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
859 @item -mthumb-interwork
860 Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
861 ARM code in mind.
862 @item -mccs
863 Turns on CodeComposer Studio assembly syntax compatibility mode.
864 @item -k
865 Specify that PIC code has been generated.
866 @end table
867 @end ifset
868 @c man end
869
870 @ifset Blackfin
871
872 @ifclear man
873 @xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
874 configured for the Blackfin processor family.
875 @end ifclear
876
877 @ifset man
878 @c man begin OPTIONS
879 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
880 the Blackfin processor family.
881 @c man end
882 @c man begin INCLUDE
883 @include c-bfin.texi
884 @c ended inside the included file
885 @end ifset
886
887 @end ifset
888
889 @c man begin OPTIONS
890 @ifset CRIS
891 See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
892 @end ifset
893
894 @ifset D10V
895 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
896 a D10V processor.
897 @table @gcctabopt
898 @cindex D10V optimization
899 @cindex optimization, D10V
900 @item -O
901 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
902 @end table
903 @end ifset
904
905 @ifset D30V
906 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
907 processor.
908 @table @gcctabopt
909 @cindex D30V optimization
910 @cindex optimization, D30V
911 @item -O
912 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
913
914 @cindex D30V nops
915 @item -n
916 Warn when nops are generated.
917
918 @cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
919 @item -N
920 Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
921 @end table
922 @end ifset
923 @c man end
924
925 @ifset EPIPHANY
926 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
927 Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
928
929 @ifclear man
930 @xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
931 configured for an Epiphany processor.
932 @end ifclear
933
934 @ifset man
935 @c man begin OPTIONS
936 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
937 an Epiphany processor.
938 @c man end
939 @c man begin INCLUDE
940 @include c-epiphany.texi
941 @c ended inside the included file
942 @end ifset
943
944 @end ifset
945
946 @ifset H8300
947
948 @ifclear man
949 @xref{H8/300 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
950 for an H8/300 processor.
951 @end ifclear
952
953 @ifset man
954 @c man begin OPTIONS
955 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an H8/300
956 processor.
957 @c man end
958 @c man begin INCLUDE
959 @include c-h8300.texi
960 @c ended inside the included file
961 @end ifset
962
963 @end ifset
964
965 @ifset I80386
966
967 @ifclear man
968 @xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
969 configured for an i386 processor.
970 @end ifclear
971
972 @ifset man
973 @c man begin OPTIONS
974 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
975 an i386 processor.
976 @c man end
977 @c man begin INCLUDE
978 @include c-i386.texi
979 @c ended inside the included file
980 @end ifset
981
982 @end ifset
983
984 @c man begin OPTIONS
985 @ifset I960
986 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
987 Intel 80960 processor.
988
989 @table @gcctabopt
990 @item -ACA | -ACA_A | -ACB | -ACC | -AKA | -AKB | -AKC | -AMC
991 Specify which variant of the 960 architecture is the target.
992
993 @item -b
994 Add code to collect statistics about branches taken.
995
996 @item -no-relax
997 Do not alter compare-and-branch instructions for long displacements;
998 error if necessary.
999
1000 @end table
1001 @end ifset
1002
1003 @ifset IP2K
1004 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1005 Ubicom IP2K series.
1006
1007 @table @gcctabopt
1008
1009 @item -mip2022ext
1010 Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
1011
1012 @item -mip2022
1013 Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
1014 just the basic IP2022 ones.
1015
1016 @end table
1017 @end ifset
1018
1019 @ifset M32C
1020 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1021 Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
1022
1023 @table @gcctabopt
1024
1025 @item -m32c
1026 Assemble M32C instructions.
1027
1028 @item -m16c
1029 Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
1030
1031 @item -relax
1032 Enable support for link-time relaxations.
1033
1034 @item -h-tick-hex
1035 Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
1036
1037 @end table
1038 @end ifset
1039
1040 @ifset M32R
1041 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1042 Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
1043
1044 @table @gcctabopt
1045
1046 @item --m32rx
1047 Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target. The default
1048 is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
1049
1050 @item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
1051 Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1052 encountered.
1053
1054 @item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
1055 Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1056 encountered.
1057
1058 @end table
1059 @end ifset
1060
1061 @ifset M680X0
1062 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1063 Motorola 68000 series.
1064
1065 @table @gcctabopt
1066
1067 @item -l
1068 Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
1069
1070 @item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
1071 @itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
1072 @itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
1073 Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target. The default
1074 is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
1075
1076 @item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
1077 The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
1078 The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32. Although
1079 the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
1080 two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
1081 coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
1082
1083 @item -m68851 | -mno-68851
1084 The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
1085 unit coprocessor. The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
1086
1087 @end table
1088 @end ifset
1089
1090 @ifset NIOSII
1091
1092 @ifclear man
1093 @xref{Nios II Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1094 for an Altera Nios II processor.
1095 @end ifclear
1096
1097 @ifset man
1098 @c man begin OPTIONS
1099 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1100 Altera Nios II processor.
1101 @c man end
1102 @c man begin INCLUDE
1103 @include c-nios2.texi
1104 @c ended inside the included file
1105 @end ifset
1106 @end ifset
1107
1108 @ifset PDP11
1109
1110 For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
1111 see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
1112
1113 @table @gcctabopt
1114 @item -mpic | -mno-pic
1115 Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code. The
1116 default is @option{-mpic}.
1117
1118 @item -mall
1119 @itemx -mall-extensions
1120 Enable all instruction set extensions. This is the default.
1121
1122 @item -mno-extensions
1123 Disable all instruction set extensions.
1124
1125 @item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
1126 Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
1127
1128 @item -m@var{cpu}
1129 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
1130 disable all other extensions.
1131
1132 @item -m@var{machine}
1133 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
1134 model, and disable all other extensions.
1135 @end table
1136
1137 @end ifset
1138
1139 @ifset PJ
1140 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1141 a picoJava processor.
1142
1143 @table @gcctabopt
1144
1145 @cindex PJ endianness
1146 @cindex endianness, PJ
1147 @cindex big endian output, PJ
1148 @item -mb
1149 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1150
1151 @cindex little endian output, PJ
1152 @item -ml
1153 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1154
1155 @end table
1156 @end ifset
1157
1158 @ifset M68HC11
1159 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1160 Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
1161
1162 @table @gcctabopt
1163
1164 @item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg
1165 Specify what processor is the target. The default is
1166 defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
1167
1168 @item --xgate-ramoffset
1169 Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into
1170 XGATE address space.
1171
1172 @item -mshort
1173 Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
1174
1175 @item -mlong
1176 Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
1177
1178 @item -mshort-double
1179 Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
1180
1181 @item -mlong-double
1182 Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
1183
1184 @item --force-long-branches
1185 Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
1186 conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
1187 sub routine.
1188
1189 @item -S | --short-branches
1190 Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
1191 when the offset is out of range.
1192
1193 @item --strict-direct-mode
1194 Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
1195 when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
1196
1197 @item --print-insn-syntax
1198 Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
1199
1200 @item --print-opcodes
1201 Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
1202
1203 @item --generate-example
1204 Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
1205 This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
1206
1207 @end table
1208 @end ifset
1209
1210 @ifset SPARC
1211 The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
1212 for the SPARC architecture:
1213
1214 @table @gcctabopt
1215 @item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
1216 @itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
1217 Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
1218
1219 @samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
1220 @samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
1221
1222 @samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
1223 UltraSPARC extensions.
1224
1225 @item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
1226 For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler. These options are
1227 equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
1228
1229 @item -bump
1230 Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
1231 @end table
1232 @end ifset
1233
1234 @ifset TIC54X
1235 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
1236 architecture.
1237
1238 @table @gcctabopt
1239 @item -mfar-mode
1240 Enable extended addressing mode. All addresses and relocations will assume
1241 extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
1242 @item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
1243 Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
1244 @item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
1245 Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
1246 behaviour in the shell.
1247 @end table
1248 @end ifset
1249
1250 @ifset MIPS
1251 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1252 a MIPS processor.
1253
1254 @table @gcctabopt
1255 @item -G @var{num}
1256 This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
1257 implicitly with the @code{gp} register. It is only accepted for targets that
1258 use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix. The default value is 8.
1259
1260 @cindex MIPS endianness
1261 @cindex endianness, MIPS
1262 @cindex big endian output, MIPS
1263 @item -EB
1264 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1265
1266 @cindex little endian output, MIPS
1267 @item -EL
1268 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1269
1270 @cindex MIPS ISA
1271 @item -mips1
1272 @itemx -mips2
1273 @itemx -mips3
1274 @itemx -mips4
1275 @itemx -mips5
1276 @itemx -mips32
1277 @itemx -mips32r2
1278 @itemx -mips32r3
1279 @itemx -mips32r5
1280 @itemx -mips64
1281 @itemx -mips64r2
1282 @itemx -mips64r3
1283 @itemx -mips64r5
1284 Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture level.
1285 @samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1286 alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1287 @samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1288 @samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips32r3},
1289 @samp{-mips32r5}, @samp{-mips64}, @samp{-mips64r2}, @samp{-mips64r3}, and
1290 @samp{-mips64r5} correspond to generic MIPS V, MIPS32, MIPS32 Release 2,
1291 MIPS32 Release 3, MIPS32 Release 5, MIPS64, MIPS64 Release 2,
1292 MIPS64 Release 3, and MIPS64 Release 5 ISA processors, respectively.
1293
1294 @item -march=@var{cpu}
1295 Generate code for a particular MIPS CPU.
1296
1297 @item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1298 Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS CPU.
1299
1300 @item -mfix7000
1301 @itemx -mno-fix7000
1302 Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1303 of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1304
1305 @item -mfix-rm7000
1306 @itemx -mno-fix-rm7000
1307 Cause nops to be inserted if a dmult or dmultu instruction is
1308 followed by a load instruction.
1309
1310 @item -mdebug
1311 @itemx -no-mdebug
1312 Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1313 section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1314
1315 @item -mpdr
1316 @itemx -mno-pdr
1317 Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1318
1319 @item -mgp32
1320 @itemx -mfp32
1321 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1322 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1323 all times. @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1324 and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1325
1326 @item -mgp64
1327 @itemx -mfp64
1328 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1329 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 64 bits wide at
1330 all times. @samp{-mgp64} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1331 and @samp{-mfp64} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1332
1333 @item -mfpxx
1334 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but using
1335 this flag in combination with @samp{-mabi=32} enables an ABI variant
1336 which will operate correctly with floating-point registers which are
1337 32 or 64 bits wide.
1338
1339 @item -modd-spreg
1340 @itemx -mno-odd-spreg
1341 Enable use of floating-point operations on odd-numbered single-precision
1342 registers when supported by the ISA. @samp{-mfpxx} implies
1343 @samp{-mno-odd-spreg}, otherwise the default is @samp{-modd-spreg}.
1344
1345 @item -mips16
1346 @itemx -no-mips16
1347 Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor. This is equivalent to putting
1348 @code{.set mips16} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-no-mips16}
1349 turns off this option.
1350
1351 @item -mmicromips
1352 @itemx -mno-micromips
1353 Generate code for the microMIPS processor. This is equivalent to putting
1354 @code{.set micromips} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-micromips}
1355 turns off this option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set nomicromips}
1356 at the start of the assembly file.
1357
1358 @item -msmartmips
1359 @itemx -mno-smartmips
1360 Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1361 equivalent to putting @code{.set smartmips} at the start of the assembly file.
1362 @samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1363
1364 @item -mips3d
1365 @itemx -no-mips3d
1366 Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1367 This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1368 @samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1369
1370 @item -mdmx
1371 @itemx -no-mdmx
1372 Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1373 This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1374 @samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1375
1376 @item -mdsp
1377 @itemx -mno-dsp
1378 Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1379 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1380 @samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1381
1382 @item -mdspr2
1383 @itemx -mno-dspr2
1384 Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1385 This option implies -mdsp.
1386 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1387 @samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1388
1389 @item -mmsa
1390 @itemx -mno-msa
1391 Generate code for the MIPS SIMD Architecture Extension.
1392 This tells the assembler to accept MSA instructions.
1393 @samp{-mno-msa} turns off this option.
1394
1395 @item -mxpa
1396 @itemx -mno-xpa
1397 Generate code for the MIPS eXtended Physical Address (XPA) Extension.
1398 This tells the assembler to accept XPA instructions.
1399 @samp{-mno-xpa} turns off this option.
1400
1401 @item -mmt
1402 @itemx -mno-mt
1403 Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1404 This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1405 @samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1406
1407 @item -mmcu
1408 @itemx -mno-mcu
1409 Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension.
1410 This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions.
1411 @samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option.
1412
1413 @item -minsn32
1414 @itemx -mno-insn32
1415 Only use 32-bit instruction encodings when generating code for the
1416 microMIPS processor. This option inhibits the use of any 16-bit
1417 instructions. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set insn32} at
1418 the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-insn32} turns off this
1419 option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set noinsn32} at the
1420 start of the assembly file. By default @samp{-mno-insn32} is
1421 selected, allowing all instructions to be used.
1422
1423 @item --construct-floats
1424 @itemx --no-construct-floats
1425 The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1426 double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1427 value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1428 the double width register. By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1429 selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1430
1431 @item --relax-branch
1432 @itemx --no-relax-branch
1433 The @samp{--relax-branch} option enables the relaxation of out-of-range
1434 branches. By default @samp{--no-relax-branch} is selected, causing any
1435 out-of-range branches to produce an error.
1436
1437 @item -mnan=@var{encoding}
1438 Select between the IEEE 754-2008 (@option{-mnan=2008}) or the legacy
1439 (@option{-mnan=legacy}) NaN encoding format. The latter is the default.
1440
1441 @cindex emulation
1442 @item --emulation=@var{name}
1443 This option was formerly used to switch between ELF and ECOFF output
1444 on targets like IRIX 5 that supported both. MIPS ECOFF support was
1445 removed in GAS 2.24, so the option now serves little purpose.
1446 It is retained for backwards compatibility.
1447
1448 The available configuration names are: @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslelf} and
1449 @samp{mipsbelf}. Choosing @samp{mipself} now has no effect, since the output
1450 is always ELF. @samp{mipslelf} and @samp{mipsbelf} select little- and
1451 big-endian output respectively, but @samp{-EL} and @samp{-EB} are now the
1452 preferred options instead.
1453
1454 @item -nocpp
1455 @command{@value{AS}} ignores this option. It is accepted for compatibility with
1456 the native tools.
1457
1458 @item --trap
1459 @itemx --no-trap
1460 @itemx --break
1461 @itemx --no-break
1462 Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1463 @samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1464 (and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1465 @samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1466 break exception.
1467
1468 @item -n
1469 When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1470 time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1471 @end table
1472 @end ifset
1473
1474 @ifset MCORE
1475 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1476 an MCore processor.
1477
1478 @table @gcctabopt
1479 @item -jsri2bsr
1480 @itemx -nojsri2bsr
1481 Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation. By default this is enabled.
1482 The command line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1483
1484 @item -sifilter
1485 @itemx -nosifilter
1486 Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour. By default this is disabled.
1487 The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command line option.
1488
1489 @item -relax
1490 Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1491
1492 @item -mcpu=[210|340]
1493 Select the cpu type on the target hardware. This controls which instructions
1494 can be assembled.
1495
1496 @item -EB
1497 Assemble for a big endian target.
1498
1499 @item -EL
1500 Assemble for a little endian target.
1501
1502 @end table
1503 @end ifset
1504 @c man end
1505
1506 @ifset METAG
1507
1508 @ifclear man
1509 @xref{Meta Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1510 for a Meta processor.
1511 @end ifclear
1512
1513 @ifset man
1514 @c man begin OPTIONS
1515 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1516 Meta processor.
1517 @c man end
1518 @c man begin INCLUDE
1519 @include c-metag.texi
1520 @c ended inside the included file
1521 @end ifset
1522
1523 @end ifset
1524
1525 @c man begin OPTIONS
1526 @ifset MMIX
1527 See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1528 @end ifset
1529
1530 @ifset NDS32
1531
1532 @ifclear man
1533 @xref{NDS32 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1534 for a NDS32 processor.
1535 @end ifclear
1536 @c ended inside the included file
1537 @end ifset
1538
1539 @ifset man
1540 @c man begin OPTIONS
1541 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1542 NDS32 processor.
1543 @c man end
1544 @c man begin INCLUDE
1545 @include c-nds32.texi
1546 @c ended inside the included file
1547 @end ifset
1548
1549 @c man end
1550 @ifset PPC
1551
1552 @ifclear man
1553 @xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1554 for a PowerPC processor.
1555 @end ifclear
1556
1557 @ifset man
1558 @c man begin OPTIONS
1559 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1560 PowerPC processor.
1561 @c man end
1562 @c man begin INCLUDE
1563 @include c-ppc.texi
1564 @c ended inside the included file
1565 @end ifset
1566
1567 @end ifset
1568
1569 @c man begin OPTIONS
1570 @ifset RX
1571 See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
1572 @end ifset
1573
1574 @ifset S390
1575 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1576 processor family.
1577
1578 @table @gcctabopt
1579 @item -m31
1580 @itemx -m64
1581 Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1582 @item -mesa
1583 @item -mzarch
1584 Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1585 Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1586 @item -march=@var{processor}
1587 Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g6}, @samp{g6},
1588 @samp{z900}, @samp{z990}, @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec}, @samp{z10},
1589 @samp{z196}, or @samp{zEC12}.
1590 @item -mregnames
1591 @itemx -mno-regnames
1592 Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1593 @item -mwarn-areg-zero
1594 Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1595 but evaluates to zero.
1596 @end table
1597 @end ifset
1598 @c man end
1599
1600 @ifset TIC6X
1601
1602 @ifclear man
1603 @xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1604 for a TMS320C6000 processor.
1605 @end ifclear
1606
1607 @ifset man
1608 @c man begin OPTIONS
1609 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1610 TMS320C6000 processor.
1611 @c man end
1612 @c man begin INCLUDE
1613 @include c-tic6x.texi
1614 @c ended inside the included file
1615 @end ifset
1616
1617 @end ifset
1618
1619 @ifset TILEGX
1620
1621 @ifclear man
1622 @xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1623 for a TILE-Gx processor.
1624 @end ifclear
1625
1626 @ifset man
1627 @c man begin OPTIONS
1628 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
1629 processor.
1630 @c man end
1631 @c man begin INCLUDE
1632 @include c-tilegx.texi
1633 @c ended inside the included file
1634 @end ifset
1635
1636 @end ifset
1637
1638 @ifset XTENSA
1639
1640 @ifclear man
1641 @xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1642 for an Xtensa processor.
1643 @end ifclear
1644
1645 @ifset man
1646 @c man begin OPTIONS
1647 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1648 Xtensa processor.
1649 @c man end
1650 @c man begin INCLUDE
1651 @include c-xtensa.texi
1652 @c ended inside the included file
1653 @end ifset
1654
1655 @end ifset
1656
1657 @c man begin OPTIONS
1658
1659 @ifset Z80
1660 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1661 a Z80 family processor.
1662 @table @gcctabopt
1663 @item -z80
1664 Assemble for Z80 processor.
1665 @item -r800
1666 Assemble for R800 processor.
1667 @item -ignore-undocumented-instructions
1668 @itemx -Wnud
1669 Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning.
1670 @item -ignore-unportable-instructions
1671 @itemx -Wnup
1672 Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning.
1673 @item -warn-undocumented-instructions
1674 @itemx -Wud
1675 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800.
1676 @item -warn-unportable-instructions
1677 @itemx -Wup
1678 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800.
1679 @item -forbid-undocumented-instructions
1680 @itemx -Fud
1681 Treat all undocumented instructions as errors.
1682 @item -forbid-unportable-instructions
1683 @itemx -Fup
1684 Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors.
1685 @end table
1686 @end ifset
1687
1688 @c man end
1689
1690 @menu
1691 * Manual:: Structure of this Manual
1692 * GNU Assembler:: The GNU Assembler
1693 * Object Formats:: Object File Formats
1694 * Command Line:: Command Line
1695 * Input Files:: Input Files
1696 * Object:: Output (Object) File
1697 * Errors:: Error and Warning Messages
1698 @end menu
1699
1700 @node Manual
1701 @section Structure of this Manual
1702
1703 @cindex manual, structure and purpose
1704 This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
1705 @sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}. We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
1706 notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
1707 @command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
1708
1709 @ifclear GENERIC
1710 We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
1711 configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
1712 @end ifclear
1713 @ifset GENERIC
1714 This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
1715 various flavors of the assembler.
1716 @end ifset
1717
1718 @cindex machine instructions (not covered)
1719 On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
1720 to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
1721 In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
1722 architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
1723 mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
1724 particular architecture.
1725 @ifset GENERIC
1726 You may want to consult the manufacturer's
1727 machine architecture manual for this information.
1728 @end ifset
1729 @ifclear GENERIC
1730 @ifset H8/300
1731 For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
1732 Series Programming Manual}. For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
1733 Programming Manual} (Renesas).
1734 @end ifset
1735 @ifset SH
1736 For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
1737 see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
1738 @cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
1739 @cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
1740 @end ifset
1741 @ifset Z8000
1742 For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
1743 @end ifset
1744 @end ifclear
1745
1746 @c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
1747 @ignore
1748 Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
1749 the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
1750 Foundation, Inc.}. This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
1751 computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
1752 once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
1753 qualification.
1754
1755 @command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
1756 human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
1757 computer-readable series of instructions. Different versions of
1758 @command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
1759 @end ignore
1760
1761 @c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
1762 @c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long". Defining "word" to any
1763 @c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
1764 @c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
1765 @c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
1766 @c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
1767 @c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
1768 @c directives).
1769
1770 @node GNU Assembler
1771 @section The GNU Assembler
1772
1773 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1774
1775 @sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
1776 @ifclear GENERIC
1777 This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
1778 configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
1779 @end ifclear
1780 If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
1781 should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
1782 architecture. Each version has much in common with the others,
1783 including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
1784 @dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
1785
1786 @cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
1787 @command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
1788 @sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
1789 @code{@value{LD}}. Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
1790 assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
1791 machine would assemble.
1792 @ifset VAX
1793 Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
1794 @end ifset
1795 @ifset M680X0
1796 @c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
1797 @c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
1798 This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
1799 assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
1800 incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
1801 @end ifset
1802
1803 @c man end
1804
1805 Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
1806 program in one pass of the source file. This has a subtle impact on the
1807 @kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
1808
1809 @node Object Formats
1810 @section Object File Formats
1811
1812 @cindex object file format
1813 The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
1814 object file formats. For the most part, this does not affect how you
1815 write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
1816 are typically different in different file formats. @xref{Symbol
1817 Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
1818 @ifclear GENERIC
1819 @ifclear MULTI-OBJ
1820 For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
1821 @value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
1822 @end ifclear
1823 @c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
1824 @ifset I960
1825 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1826 @code{b.out} or COFF format object files.
1827 @end ifset
1828 @ifset HPPA
1829 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1830 SOM or ELF format object files.
1831 @end ifset
1832 @end ifclear
1833
1834 @node Command Line
1835 @section Command Line
1836
1837 @cindex command line conventions
1838
1839 After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
1840 options and file names. Options may appear in any order, and may be
1841 before, after, or between file names. The order of file names is
1842 significant.
1843
1844 @cindex standard input, as input file
1845 @kindex --
1846 @file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
1847 explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
1848
1849 @cindex options, command line
1850 Except for @samp{--} any command line argument that begins with a
1851 hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option. Each option changes the behavior of
1852 @command{@value{AS}}. No option changes the way another option works. An
1853 option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
1854 the letter is important. All options are optional.
1855
1856 Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them. The file
1857 name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
1858 with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
1859 standard). These two command lines are equivalent:
1860
1861 @smallexample
1862 @value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
1863 @value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
1864 @end smallexample
1865
1866 @node Input Files
1867 @section Input Files
1868
1869 @cindex input
1870 @cindex source program
1871 @cindex files, input
1872 We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
1873 describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}. The program may
1874 be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
1875 doesn't change the meaning of the source.
1876
1877 @c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
1878 @c APL training... doc@cygnus.com
1879 The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
1880 order specified.
1881
1882 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1883 Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
1884 program. The source program is made up of one or more files.
1885 (The standard input is also a file.)
1886
1887 You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
1888 names. The input files are read (from left file name to right). A
1889 command line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
1890 is taken to be an input file name.
1891
1892 If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
1893 from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal. You
1894 may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
1895 to assemble.
1896
1897 Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
1898 in your command line.
1899
1900 If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
1901 file.
1902
1903 @c man end
1904
1905 @subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
1906
1907 @cindex input file linenumbers
1908 @cindex line numbers, in input files
1909 There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
1910 either may be used in reporting error messages. One way refers to a line
1911 number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
1912 ``logical'' file. @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
1913
1914 @dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
1915 to @command{@value{AS}}.
1916
1917 @dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
1918 directives; they bear no relation to physical files. Logical file names help
1919 error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
1920 is itself synthesized from other files. @command{@value{AS}} understands the
1921 @samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor. See also
1922 @ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
1923
1924 @node Object
1925 @section Output (Object) File
1926
1927 @cindex object file
1928 @cindex output file
1929 @kindex a.out
1930 @kindex .o
1931 Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
1932 your assembly language program translated into numbers. This file
1933 is the object file. Its default name is
1934 @ifclear BOUT
1935 @code{a.out}.
1936 @end ifclear
1937 @ifset BOUT
1938 @ifset GENERIC
1939 @code{a.out}, or
1940 @end ifset
1941 @code{b.out} when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for the Intel 80960.
1942 @end ifset
1943 You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option. Conventionally,
1944 object file names end with @file{.o}. The default name is used for historical
1945 reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
1946 directly into a runnable program. (For some formats, this isn't currently
1947 possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
1948
1949 @cindex linker
1950 @kindex ld
1951 The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}. It contains
1952 assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
1953 the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
1954 information for the debugger.
1955
1956 @c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
1957 @c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
1958
1959 @node Errors
1960 @section Error and Warning Messages
1961
1962 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1963
1964 @cindex error messages
1965 @cindex warning messages
1966 @cindex messages from assembler
1967 @command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
1968 file (usually your terminal). This should not happen when a compiler
1969 runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically. Warnings report an assumption made so
1970 that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
1971 grave problem that stops the assembly.
1972
1973 @c man end
1974
1975 @cindex format of warning messages
1976 Warning messages have the format
1977
1978 @smallexample
1979 file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
1980 @end smallexample
1981
1982 @noindent
1983 @cindex line numbers, in warnings/errors
1984 (where @b{NNN} is a line number). If a logical file name has been given
1985 (@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) it is used for the filename, otherwise the name of
1986 the current input file is used. If a logical line number was given
1987 @ifset GENERIC
1988 (@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
1989 @end ifset
1990 then it is used to calculate the number printed,
1991 otherwise the actual line in the current source file is printed. The
1992 message text is intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix
1993 tradition).
1994
1995 @cindex format of error messages
1996 Error messages have the format
1997 @smallexample
1998 file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
1999 @end smallexample
2000 The file name and line number are derived as for warning
2001 messages. The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
2002 because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
2003
2004 @node Invoking
2005 @chapter Command-Line Options
2006
2007 @cindex options, all versions of assembler
2008 This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
2009 versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
2010 for options specific
2011 @ifclear GENERIC
2012 to the @value{TARGET} target.
2013 @end ifclear
2014 @ifset GENERIC
2015 to particular machine architectures.
2016 @end ifset
2017
2018 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2019
2020 If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
2021 you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
2022 The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
2023 by commas. For example:
2024
2025 @smallexample
2026 gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
2027 @end smallexample
2028
2029 @noindent
2030 This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
2031 standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
2032 local symbols in the symbol table).
2033
2034 Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
2035 command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
2036 (You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
2037 precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
2038 assembler.)
2039
2040 @c man end
2041
2042 @menu
2043 * a:: -a[cdghlns] enable listings
2044 * alternate:: --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
2045 * D:: -D for compatibility
2046 * f:: -f to work faster
2047 * I:: -I for .include search path
2048 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2049 * K:: -K for compatibility
2050 @end ifclear
2051 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2052 * K:: -K for difference tables
2053 @end ifset
2054
2055 * L:: -L to retain local symbols
2056 * listing:: --listing-XXX to configure listing output
2057 * M:: -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
2058 * MD:: --MD for dependency tracking
2059 * o:: -o to name the object file
2060 * R:: -R to join data and text sections
2061 * statistics:: --statistics to see statistics about assembly
2062 * traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
2063 * v:: -v to announce version
2064 * W:: -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
2065 * Z:: -Z to make object file even after errors
2066 @end menu
2067
2068 @node a
2069 @section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
2070
2071 @kindex -a
2072 @kindex -ac
2073 @kindex -ad
2074 @kindex -ag
2075 @kindex -ah
2076 @kindex -al
2077 @kindex -an
2078 @kindex -as
2079 @cindex listings, enabling
2080 @cindex assembly listings, enabling
2081
2082 These options enable listing output from the assembler. By itself,
2083 @samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
2084 You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
2085 @samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
2086 @samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
2087 @samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
2088 High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
2089 @samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
2090 also.
2091
2092 Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
2093 information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
2094
2095 Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing. Any lines
2096 which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
2097 other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
2098 omitted from the listing.
2099
2100 Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
2101 listing.
2102
2103 Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
2104 listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
2105 @code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
2106 @code{.sbttl}.
2107 The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
2108 If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
2109 listing-control directives have no effect.
2110
2111 The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
2112 @emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
2113
2114 Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
2115 because it
2116 is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command line switch
2117 is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
2118 directives. This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
2119 stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler. This reduces
2120 memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
2121
2122 @node alternate
2123 @section @option{--alternate}
2124
2125 @kindex --alternate
2126 Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
2127
2128 @node D
2129 @section @option{-D}
2130
2131 @kindex -D
2132 This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
2133 likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
2134 @command{@value{AS}}.
2135
2136 @node f
2137 @section Work Faster: @option{-f}
2138
2139 @kindex -f
2140 @cindex trusted compiler
2141 @cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
2142 @samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
2143 (trusted) compiler. @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
2144 and comment preprocessing on
2145 the input file(s) before assembling them. @xref{Preprocessing,
2146 ,Preprocessing}.
2147
2148 @quotation
2149 @emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
2150 preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
2151 not work correctly.
2152 @end quotation
2153
2154 @node I
2155 @section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
2156
2157 @kindex -I @var{path}
2158 @cindex paths for @code{.include}
2159 @cindex search path for @code{.include}
2160 @cindex @code{include} directive search path
2161 Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
2162 @command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
2163 directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You may use @option{-I} as
2164 many times as necessary to include a variety of paths. The current
2165 working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
2166 searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
2167 specified (left to right) on the command line.
2168
2169 @node K
2170 @section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
2171
2172 @kindex -K
2173 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2174 On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect. It is
2175 permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
2176 where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
2177 generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables. The @value{TARGET}
2178 family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
2179 alteration on other platforms.
2180 @end ifclear
2181
2182 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2183 @cindex difference tables, warning
2184 @cindex warning for altered difference tables
2185 @command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
2186 form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
2187 You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
2188 is done.
2189 @end ifset
2190
2191 @node L
2192 @section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
2193
2194 @kindex -L
2195 @cindex local symbols, retaining in output
2196 Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
2197 @samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
2198 called @dfn{local symbols}. @xref{Symbol Names}. Normally you do not see
2199 such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
2200 programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
2201 notice. Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
2202 such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
2203
2204 This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
2205 in the object file. Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
2206 @code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
2207
2208 @node listing
2209 @section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
2210
2211 The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line switch
2212 @samp{-a} (@pxref{a}). This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
2213 hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
2214 them as a listing file. The format of this listing can be controlled by
2215 directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
2216 @code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
2217 @code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
2218 @code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
2219
2220 @table @gcctabopt
2221 @item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
2222 @kindex --listing-lhs-width
2223 @cindex Width of first line disassembly output
2224 Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump. This
2225 dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
2226
2227 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
2228 @kindex --listing-lhs-width2
2229 @cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
2230 Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
2231 a given input source line. If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
2232 the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}. If neither
2233 switch is used the default is to one.
2234
2235 @item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
2236 @kindex --listing-rhs-width
2237 @cindex Width of source line output
2238 Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
2239 alongside the hex dump. The default value for this parameter is 100. The
2240 source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
2241
2242 @item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
2243 @kindex --listing-cont-lines
2244 @cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
2245 Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
2246 displayed for a given single line of source input. The default value is 4.
2247 @end table
2248
2249 @node M
2250 @section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
2251
2252 @kindex -M
2253 @cindex MRI compatibility mode
2254 The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode. This
2255 changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
2256 compatible with the @code{ASM68K} or the @code{ASM960} (depending upon the
2257 configured target) assembler from Microtec Research. The exact nature of the
2258 MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
2259 information. Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
2260 arguments is somewhat different. The purpose of this option is to permit
2261 assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
2262
2263 The MRI compatibility is not complete. Certain operations of the MRI assembler
2264 depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
2265 file formats. Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
2266 individually. These are:
2267
2268 @itemize @bullet
2269 @item global symbols in common section
2270
2271 The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
2272 Other object file formats do not support this. @command{@value{AS}} handles
2273 common sections by treating them as a single common symbol. It permits local
2274 symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
2275 symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
2276
2277 @item complex relocations
2278
2279 The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
2280 relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections. These
2281 are not support by other object file formats.
2282
2283 @item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
2284
2285 The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
2286 This is not supported by other object file formats. The start address may
2287 instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
2288 script.
2289
2290 @item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
2291
2292 The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
2293 name to the output file. This is not supported by other object file formats.
2294
2295 @item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
2296
2297 The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
2298 address. This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
2299 which changes the location within the current section. Absolute sections are
2300 not supported by other object file formats. The address of a section may be
2301 assigned within a linker script.
2302 @end itemize
2303
2304 There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
2305 @command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
2306 seem of little consequence. Some of these may be supported in future releases.
2307
2308 @itemize @bullet
2309
2310 @item EBCDIC strings
2311
2312 EBCDIC strings are not supported.
2313
2314 @item packed binary coded decimal
2315
2316 Packed binary coded decimal is not supported. This means that the @code{DC.P}
2317 and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
2318
2319 @item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
2320
2321 The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
2322
2323 @item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
2324
2325 The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
2326
2327 @item @code{OPT} branch control options
2328
2329 The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
2330 @code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored. @command{@value{AS}} automatically
2331 relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
2332 these options serve no purpose.
2333
2334 @item @code{OPT} list control options
2335
2336 The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
2337 @code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
2338 @code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
2339
2340 @item other @code{OPT} options
2341
2342 The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
2343 @code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
2344
2345 @item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
2346
2347 The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
2348 @code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
2349
2350 @item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
2351
2352 The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
2353
2354 @item @code{.debug} pseudo-op
2355
2356 The i960 @code{.debug} pseudo-op is not supported.
2357
2358 @item @code{.extended} pseudo-op
2359
2360 The i960 @code{.extended} pseudo-op is not supported.
2361
2362 @item @code{.list} pseudo-op.
2363
2364 The various options of the i960 @code{.list} pseudo-op are not supported.
2365
2366 @item @code{.optimize} pseudo-op
2367
2368 The i960 @code{.optimize} pseudo-op is not supported.
2369
2370 @item @code{.output} pseudo-op
2371
2372 The i960 @code{.output} pseudo-op is not supported.
2373
2374 @item @code{.setreal} pseudo-op
2375
2376 The i960 @code{.setreal} pseudo-op is not supported.
2377
2378 @end itemize
2379
2380 @node MD
2381 @section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
2382
2383 @kindex --MD
2384 @cindex dependency tracking
2385 @cindex make rules
2386
2387 @command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates. This
2388 file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
2389 dependencies of the main source file.
2390
2391 The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
2392
2393 This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
2394
2395 @node o
2396 @section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
2397
2398 @kindex -o
2399 @cindex naming object file
2400 @cindex object file name
2401 There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}. By
2402 default it has the name
2403 @ifset GENERIC
2404 @ifset I960
2405 @file{a.out} (or @file{b.out}, for Intel 960 targets only).
2406 @end ifset
2407 @ifclear I960
2408 @file{a.out}.
2409 @end ifclear
2410 @end ifset
2411 @ifclear GENERIC
2412 @ifset I960
2413 @file{b.out}.
2414 @end ifset
2415 @ifclear I960
2416 @file{a.out}.
2417 @end ifclear
2418 @end ifclear
2419 You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2420 object file a different name.
2421
2422 Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2423 existing file of the same name.
2424
2425 @node R
2426 @section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2427
2428 @kindex -R
2429 @cindex data and text sections, joining
2430 @cindex text and data sections, joining
2431 @cindex joining text and data sections
2432 @cindex merging text and data sections
2433 @option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2434 data-section data lives in the text section. This is only done at
2435 the very last moment: your binary data are the same, but data
2436 section parts are relocated differently. The data section part of
2437 your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2438 appended to the text section. (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2439
2440 When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2441 address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2442 data section). We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2443 older versions of @command{@value{AS}}. In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2444
2445 @ifset COFF-ELF
2446 When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2447 this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2448 @samp{.data}.
2449 @end ifset
2450
2451 @ifset HPPA
2452 @option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets. Using
2453 @option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2454 @end ifset
2455
2456 @node statistics
2457 @section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2458
2459 @kindex --statistics
2460 @cindex statistics, about assembly
2461 @cindex time, total for assembly
2462 @cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2463 Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2464 @command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2465 (in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2466 seconds).
2467
2468 @node traditional-format
2469 @section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2470
2471 @kindex --traditional-format
2472 For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2473 from the output of some existing assembler. This switch requests
2474 @command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2475
2476 For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2477 @command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2478
2479 @node v
2480 @section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2481
2482 @kindex -v
2483 @kindex -version
2484 @cindex assembler version
2485 @cindex version of assembler
2486 You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2487 option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2488 command line.
2489
2490 @node W
2491 @section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2492
2493 @command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2494 assembling compiler output. But programs written by people often
2495 cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2496 made. All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2497
2498 @kindex -W
2499 @kindex --no-warn
2500 @cindex suppressing warnings
2501 @cindex warnings, suppressing
2502 If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2503 This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2504 how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file. Errors, which stop the assembly,
2505 are still reported.
2506
2507 @kindex --fatal-warnings
2508 @cindex errors, caused by warnings
2509 @cindex warnings, causing error
2510 If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2511 files that generate warnings to be in error.
2512
2513 @kindex --warn
2514 @cindex warnings, switching on
2515 You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2516 causes warnings to be output as usual.
2517
2518 @node Z
2519 @section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2520 @cindex object file, after errors
2521 @cindex errors, continuing after
2522 After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output. If for
2523 some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2524 @command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2525 option. If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2526 writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2527 errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2528
2529 @node Syntax
2530 @chapter Syntax
2531
2532 @cindex machine-independent syntax
2533 @cindex syntax, machine-independent
2534 This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2535 source file. @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2536 assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2537 @ifclear VAX
2538 assembler.
2539 @end ifclear
2540 @ifset VAX
2541 assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2542 @end ifset
2543
2544 @menu
2545 * Preprocessing:: Preprocessing
2546 * Whitespace:: Whitespace
2547 * Comments:: Comments
2548 * Symbol Intro:: Symbols
2549 * Statements:: Statements
2550 * Constants:: Constants
2551 @end menu
2552
2553 @node Preprocessing
2554 @section Preprocessing
2555
2556 @cindex preprocessing
2557 The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2558 @itemize @bullet
2559 @cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2560 @item
2561 adjusts and removes extra whitespace. It leaves one space or tab before
2562 the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2563 a single space.
2564
2565 @cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2566 @item
2567 removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2568 appropriate number of newlines.
2569
2570 @cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2571 @item
2572 converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2573 @end itemize
2574
2575 It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2576 anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor. You can
2577 do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2578 (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2579 to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2580 @samp{.S} suffix. @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of
2581 Output, gcc.info, Using GNU CC}.
2582
2583 Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2584 cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2585 preprocessed.
2586
2587 @cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2588 @cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2589 @kindex #NO_APP
2590 @kindex #APP
2591 If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2592 @samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2593 Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2594 specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2595 text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2596 @code{#NO_APP} after this text. This feature is mainly intend to support
2597 @code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2598 and whitespace.
2599
2600 @node Whitespace
2601 @section Whitespace
2602
2603 @cindex whitespace
2604 @dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2605 Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2606 people to read. Unless within character constants
2607 (@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2608 as exactly one space.
2609
2610 @node Comments
2611 @section Comments
2612
2613 @cindex comments
2614 There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}. In both
2615 cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2616
2617 Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2618 This means you may not nest these comments.
2619
2620 @smallexample
2621 /*
2622 The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2623 is to use this sort of comment.
2624 */
2625
2626 /* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2627 @end smallexample
2628
2629 @cindex line comment character
2630 Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
2631 considered a comment and is ignored. The line comment character is target
2632 specific, and some targets multiple comment characters. Some targets also have
2633 line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
2634 line. Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
2635 comment. Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
2636 upon command line options that have been used. For more details see the
2637 @emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
2638
2639 If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
2640 special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
2641 to specify logical line numbers:
2642
2643 @kindex #
2644 @cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2645 @cindex logical line numbers
2646 To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2647 special interpretation. Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2648 expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2649 line. Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2650 new logical file name. The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2651
2652 If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2653 the line is ignored. (Just like a comment.)
2654
2655 @smallexample
2656 # This is an ordinary comment.
2657 # 42-6 "new_file_name" # New logical file name
2658 # This is logical line # 36.
2659 @end smallexample
2660 This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2661 of @command{@value{AS}}.
2662
2663 @node Symbol Intro
2664 @section Symbols
2665
2666 @cindex characters used in symbols
2667 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2668 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2669 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2670 @samp{_.$}.
2671 @end ifclear
2672 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2673 @ifclear GENERIC
2674 @ifset H8
2675 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2676 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2677 @samp{._$}. (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2678 symbol names.)
2679 @end ifset
2680 @end ifclear
2681 @end ifset
2682 @ifset GENERIC
2683 On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2684 are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2685 @end ifset
2686 No symbol may begin with a digit. Case is significant.
2687 There is no length limit: all characters are significant. Multibyte characters
2688 are supported. Symbols are delimited by characters not in that set, or by the
2689 beginning of a file (since the source program must end with a newline, the end
2690 of a file is not a possible symbol delimiter). @xref{Symbols}.
2691 @cindex length of symbols
2692
2693 @node Statements
2694 @section Statements
2695
2696 @cindex statements, structure of
2697 @cindex line separator character
2698 @cindex statement separator character
2699
2700 A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
2701 @dfn{line separator character}. The line separator character is target
2702 specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
2703 target's documentation. Not all targets support a line separator character.
2704 The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
2705 preceding statement. Newlines and separators within character constants are an
2706 exception: they do not end statements.
2707
2708 @cindex newline, required at file end
2709 @cindex EOF, newline must precede
2710 It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last
2711 character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
2712
2713 An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace. It is ignored.
2714
2715 @cindex instructions and directives
2716 @cindex directives and instructions
2717 @c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
2718 @c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously... doc@cygnus.com,
2719 @c 13feb91.
2720 A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
2721 key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is. The key
2722 symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement. If the
2723 symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
2724 directive: typically valid for any computer. If the symbol begins with
2725 a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
2726 assembles into a machine language instruction.
2727 @ifset GENERIC
2728 Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
2729 recognize different instructions. In fact, the same symbol may
2730 represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
2731 language.@refill
2732 @end ifset
2733
2734 @cindex @code{:} (label)
2735 @cindex label (@code{:})
2736 A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
2737 Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
2738 have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
2739
2740 @ifset HPPA
2741 For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
2742 the definition of a label must begin in column zero. This also implies that
2743 only one label may be defined on each line.
2744 @end ifset
2745
2746 @smallexample
2747 label: .directive followed by something
2748 another_label: # This is an empty statement.
2749 instruction operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
2750 @end smallexample
2751
2752 @node Constants
2753 @section Constants
2754
2755 @cindex constants
2756 A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
2757 inspection, without knowing any context. Like this:
2758 @smallexample
2759 @group
2760 .byte 74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
2761 .ascii "Ring the bell\7" # A string constant.
2762 .octa 0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
2763 .float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
2764 95028841971.693993751E-40 # - pi, a flonum.
2765 @end group
2766 @end smallexample
2767
2768 @menu
2769 * Characters:: Character Constants
2770 * Numbers:: Number Constants
2771 @end menu
2772
2773 @node Characters
2774 @subsection Character Constants
2775
2776 @cindex character constants
2777 @cindex constants, character
2778 There are two kinds of character constants. A @dfn{character} stands
2779 for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
2780 numeric expressions. String constants (properly called string
2781 @emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
2782 used in arithmetic expressions.
2783
2784 @menu
2785 * Strings:: Strings
2786 * Chars:: Characters
2787 @end menu
2788
2789 @node Strings
2790 @subsubsection Strings
2791
2792 @cindex string constants
2793 @cindex constants, string
2794 A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes. It may contain
2795 double-quotes or null characters. The way to get special characters
2796 into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
2797 a backslash @samp{\} character. For example @samp{\\} represents
2798 one backslash: the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
2799 @command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
2800 (which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
2801 escape character). The complete list of escapes follows.
2802
2803 @cindex escape codes, character
2804 @cindex character escape codes
2805 @table @kbd
2806 @c @item \a
2807 @c Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
2808 @c
2809 @cindex @code{\b} (backspace character)
2810 @cindex backspace (@code{\b})
2811 @item \b
2812 Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
2813
2814 @c @item \e
2815 @c Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
2816 @c
2817 @cindex @code{\f} (formfeed character)
2818 @cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
2819 @item \f
2820 Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
2821
2822 @cindex @code{\n} (newline character)
2823 @cindex newline (@code{\n})
2824 @item \n
2825 Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
2826
2827 @c @item \p
2828 @c Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
2829 @c
2830 @cindex @code{\r} (carriage return character)
2831 @cindex carriage return (@code{\r})
2832 @item \r
2833 Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
2834
2835 @c @item \s
2836 @c Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040. Included for compliance with
2837 @c other assemblers.
2838 @c
2839 @cindex @code{\t} (tab)
2840 @cindex tab (@code{\t})
2841 @item \t
2842 Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
2843
2844 @c @item \v
2845 @c Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
2846 @c @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2847 @c A hexadecimal character code. The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
2848 @c
2849 @cindex @code{\@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
2850 @cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
2851 @item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2852 An octal character code. The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
2853 For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
2854 for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
2855
2856 @cindex @code{\@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
2857 @cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
2858 @item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
2859 A hex character code. All trailing hex digits are combined. Either upper or
2860 lower case @code{x} works.
2861
2862 @cindex @code{\\} (@samp{\} character)
2863 @cindex backslash (@code{\\})
2864 @item \\
2865 Represents one @samp{\} character.
2866
2867 @c @item \'
2868 @c Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
2869 @c This is needed in single character literals
2870 @c (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
2871 @c a @samp{'}.
2872 @c
2873 @cindex @code{\"} (doublequote character)
2874 @cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
2875 @item \"
2876 Represents one @samp{"} character. Needed in strings to represent
2877 this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
2878
2879 @item \ @var{anything-else}
2880 Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
2881 assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present. The idea is that if
2882 you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
2883 interpretation of the following character. However @command{@value{AS}} has no
2884 other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
2885 code and warns you of the fact.
2886 @end table
2887
2888 Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
2889 varies widely among assemblers. The current set is what we think
2890 the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
2891 compilers recognize. If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
2892 sequence.
2893
2894 @node Chars
2895 @subsubsection Characters
2896
2897 @cindex single character constant
2898 @cindex character, single
2899 @cindex constant, single character
2900 A single character may be written as a single quote immediately
2901 followed by that character. The same escapes apply to characters as
2902 to strings. So if you want to write the character backslash, you
2903 must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes the second
2904 @code{\}. As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a
2905 grave accent. A newline
2906 @ifclear GENERIC
2907 @ifclear abnormal-separator
2908 (or semicolon @samp{;})
2909 @end ifclear
2910 @ifset abnormal-separator
2911 @ifset H8
2912 (or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
2913 Renesas SH)
2914 @end ifset
2915 @end ifset
2916 @end ifclear
2917 immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
2918 and does not count as the end of a statement. The value of a character
2919 constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
2920 that character. @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
2921 @kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
2922
2923 @node Numbers
2924 @subsection Number Constants
2925
2926 @cindex constants, number
2927 @cindex number constants
2928 @command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
2929 are stored in the target machine. @emph{Integers} are numbers that
2930 would fit into an @code{int} in the C language. @emph{Bignums} are
2931 integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits. @emph{Flonums}
2932 are floating point numbers, described below.
2933
2934 @menu
2935 * Integers:: Integers
2936 * Bignums:: Bignums
2937 * Flonums:: Flonums
2938 @ifclear GENERIC
2939 @ifset I960
2940 * Bit Fields:: Bit Fields
2941 @end ifset
2942 @end ifclear
2943 @end menu
2944
2945 @node Integers
2946 @subsubsection Integers
2947 @cindex integers
2948 @cindex constants, integer
2949
2950 @cindex binary integers
2951 @cindex integers, binary
2952 A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
2953 the binary digits @samp{01}.
2954
2955 @cindex octal integers
2956 @cindex integers, octal
2957 An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
2958 digits (@samp{01234567}).
2959
2960 @cindex decimal integers
2961 @cindex integers, decimal
2962 A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
2963 more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
2964
2965 @cindex hexadecimal integers
2966 @cindex integers, hexadecimal
2967 A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
2968 more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
2969
2970 Integers have the usual values. To denote a negative integer, use
2971 the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
2972 (@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
2973
2974 @node Bignums
2975 @subsubsection Bignums
2976
2977 @cindex bignums
2978 @cindex constants, bignum
2979 A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
2980 except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
2981 represent in binary. The distinction is made because in some places
2982 integers are permitted while bignums are not.
2983
2984 @node Flonums
2985 @subsubsection Flonums
2986 @cindex flonums
2987 @cindex floating point numbers
2988 @cindex constants, floating point
2989
2990 @cindex precision, floating point
2991 A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number. The translation is
2992 indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
2993 @command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
2994 sufficient precision. This generic floating point number is converted
2995 to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
2996 portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
2997
2998 A flonum is written by writing (in order)
2999 @itemize @bullet
3000 @item
3001 The digit @samp{0}.
3002 @ifset HPPA
3003 (@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
3004 @end ifset
3005
3006 @item
3007 A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
3008 @ifset GENERIC
3009 @kbd{e} is recommended. Case is not important.
3010 @ignore
3011 @c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
3012 (Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed. Vax BSD
3013 4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
3014 @end ignore
3015
3016 On the H8/300, Renesas / SuperH SH,
3017 and AMD 29K architectures, the letter must be
3018 one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3019
3020 On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
3021 (in upper or lower case).
3022
3023 On the Intel 960 architecture, the letter must be
3024 one of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3025
3026 On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
3027 @end ifset
3028 @ifclear GENERIC
3029 @ifset ARC
3030 One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
3031 @end ifset
3032 @ifset H8
3033 One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3034 @end ifset
3035 @ifset HPPA
3036 The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
3037 @end ifset
3038 @ifset I960
3039 One of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3040 @end ifset
3041 @end ifclear
3042
3043 @item
3044 An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3045
3046 @item
3047 An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
3048
3049 @item
3050 An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
3051 or more decimal digits.
3052
3053 @item
3054 An optional exponent, consisting of:
3055
3056 @itemize @bullet
3057 @item
3058 An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
3059 @c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
3060 @c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
3061 @item
3062 Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3063 @item
3064 One or more decimal digits.
3065 @end itemize
3066
3067 @end itemize
3068
3069 At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
3070 present. The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
3071
3072 @command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers. Flonums are computed
3073 independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
3074 @command{@value{AS}}.
3075
3076 @ifclear GENERIC
3077 @ifset I960
3078 @c Bit fields are written as a general facility but are also controlled
3079 @c by a conditional-compilation flag---which is as of now (21mar91)
3080 @c turned on only by the i960 config of GAS.
3081 @node Bit Fields
3082 @subsubsection Bit Fields
3083
3084 @cindex bit fields
3085 @cindex constants, bit field
3086 You can also define numeric constants as @dfn{bit fields}.
3087 Specify two numbers separated by a colon---
3088 @example
3089 @var{mask}:@var{value}
3090 @end example
3091 @noindent
3092 @command{@value{AS}} applies a bitwise @sc{and} between @var{mask} and
3093 @var{value}.
3094
3095 The resulting number is then packed
3096 @ifset GENERIC
3097 @c this conditional paren in case bit fields turned on elsewhere than 960
3098 (in host-dependent byte order)
3099 @end ifset
3100 into a field whose width depends on which assembler directive has the
3101 bit-field as its argument. Overflow (a result from the bitwise and
3102 requiring more binary digits to represent) is not an error; instead,
3103 more constants are generated, of the specified width, beginning with the
3104 least significant digits.@refill
3105
3106 The directives @code{.byte}, @code{.hword}, @code{.int}, @code{.long},
3107 @code{.short}, and @code{.word} accept bit-field arguments.
3108 @end ifset
3109 @end ifclear
3110
3111 @node Sections
3112 @chapter Sections and Relocation
3113 @cindex sections
3114 @cindex relocation
3115
3116 @menu
3117 * Secs Background:: Background
3118 * Ld Sections:: Linker Sections
3119 * As Sections:: Assembler Internal Sections
3120 * Sub-Sections:: Sub-Sections
3121 * bss:: bss Section
3122 @end menu
3123
3124 @node Secs Background
3125 @section Background
3126
3127 Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
3128 ``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
3129 For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
3130
3131 @cindex linker, and assembler
3132 @cindex assembler, and linker
3133 The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
3134 combines their contents to form a runnable program. When @command{@value{AS}}
3135 emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
3136 @code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
3137 different partial programs do not overlap. This is actually an
3138 oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
3139 sections.
3140
3141 @code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
3142 addresses. These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
3143 units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
3144 within them. Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}. Assigning
3145 run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}. It includes
3146 the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
3147 the proper run-time addresses.
3148 @ifset H8
3149 For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
3150 @command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
3151 ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
3152 @end ifset
3153
3154 @cindex standard assembler sections
3155 An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
3156 of which may be empty. These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
3157 @dfn{bss} sections.
3158
3159 @ifset COFF-ELF
3160 @ifset GENERIC
3161 When it generates COFF or ELF output,
3162 @end ifset
3163 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
3164 using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
3165 If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
3166 or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
3167 @end ifset
3168
3169 @ifset HPPA
3170 @ifset GENERIC
3171 When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
3172 @end ifset
3173 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
3174 specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives. See
3175 @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
3176 (HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
3177 assembler directives.
3178
3179 @ifset SOM
3180 Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
3181 text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output. Program text
3182 is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
3183 BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
3184 @end ifset
3185 @end ifset
3186
3187 Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
3188 data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
3189
3190 @ifset HPPA
3191 When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
3192 section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
3193 @code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
3194 @end ifset
3195
3196 To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
3197 relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
3198 object file details of the relocation needed. To perform relocation
3199 @code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
3200 file is mentioned:
3201 @itemize @bullet
3202 @item
3203 Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
3204 an address?
3205 @item
3206 How long (in bytes) is this reference?
3207 @item
3208 Which section does the address refer to? What is the numeric value of
3209 @display
3210 (@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
3211 @end display
3212 @item
3213 Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
3214 @end itemize
3215
3216 @cindex addresses, format of
3217 @cindex section-relative addressing
3218 In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
3219 @display
3220 (@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
3221 @end display
3222 @noindent
3223 Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
3224 nature.
3225 @ifset SOM
3226 (For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
3227 symbol-relative instead.)
3228 @end ifset
3229
3230 In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
3231 @var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
3232
3233 Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
3234 @dfn{absolute} section. When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
3235 addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged. For example, address
3236 @code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
3237 @code{@value{LD}}. Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
3238 data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
3239 their absolute sections must overlap. Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
3240 part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
3241 address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
3242
3243 The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section. Any
3244 address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
3245 rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
3246 Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
3247 address is to mention an undefined symbol. A reference to a named
3248 common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
3249 time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
3250
3251 By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
3252 the linked program. @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
3253 sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program. It is
3254 customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
3255 the addresses of all partial programs' text sections. Likewise for
3256 data and bss sections.
3257
3258 Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
3259 use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
3260
3261 @node Ld Sections
3262 @section Linker Sections
3263 @code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
3264
3265 @table @strong
3266
3267 @ifset COFF-ELF
3268 @cindex named sections
3269 @cindex sections, named
3270 @item named sections
3271 @end ifset
3272 @ifset aout-bout
3273 @cindex text section
3274 @cindex data section
3275 @itemx text section
3276 @itemx data section
3277 @end ifset
3278 These sections hold your program. @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
3279 separate but equal sections. Anything you can say of one section is
3280 true of another.
3281 @c @ifset aout-bout
3282 When the program is running, however, it is
3283 customary for the text section to be unalterable. The
3284 text section is often shared among processes: it contains
3285 instructions, constants and the like. The data section of a running
3286 program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
3287 in the data section.
3288 @c @end ifset
3289
3290 @cindex bss section
3291 @item bss section
3292 This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running. It
3293 is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage. The length of
3294 each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
3295 out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
3296 bytes in the object file. The bss section was invented to eliminate
3297 those explicit zeros from object files.
3298
3299 @cindex absolute section
3300 @item absolute section
3301 Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
3302 This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
3303 not change when relocating. In this sense we speak of absolute
3304 addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
3305
3306 @cindex undefined section
3307 @item undefined section
3308 This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
3309 the preceding sections.
3310 @c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
3311 @end table
3312
3313 @cindex relocation example
3314 An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3315 @ifset COFF-ELF
3316 The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3317 @end ifset
3318 Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3319
3320 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3321 @ifnottex
3322 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3323 @smallexample
3324 +-----+----+--+
3325 partial program # 1: |ttttt|dddd|00|
3326 +-----+----+--+
3327
3328 text data bss
3329 seg. seg. seg.
3330
3331 +---+---+---+
3332 partial program # 2: |TTT|DDD|000|
3333 +---+---+---+
3334
3335 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3336 linked program: | |TTT|ttttt| |dddd|DDD|00000|
3337 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3338
3339 addresses: 0 @dots{}
3340 @end smallexample
3341 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3342 @end ifnottex
3343 @need 5000
3344 @tex
3345 \bigskip
3346 \line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3347 \line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3348 \line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3349
3350 \line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3351 \line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3352 \line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3353
3354 \line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3355 \line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3356 \line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3357 ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3358 DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3359
3360 \line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3361 \line{0\dots\hfil}
3362
3363 @end tex
3364 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3365
3366 @node As Sections
3367 @section Assembler Internal Sections
3368
3369 @cindex internal assembler sections
3370 @cindex sections in messages, internal
3371 These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}. They
3372 have no meaning at run-time. You do not really need to know about these
3373 sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3374 warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3375 meanings to @command{@value{AS}}. These sections are used to permit the
3376 value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3377 section-relative address.
3378
3379 @table @b
3380 @cindex assembler internal logic error
3381 @item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3382 An internal assembler logic error has been found. This means there is a
3383 bug in the assembler.
3384
3385 @cindex expr (internal section)
3386 @item expr section
3387 The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3388 symbols. When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3389 it in the expr section.
3390 @c FIXME item debug
3391 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3392 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3393 @c FIXME item register
3394 @end table
3395
3396 @node Sub-Sections
3397 @section Sub-Sections
3398
3399 @cindex numbered subsections
3400 @cindex grouping data
3401 @ifset aout-bout
3402 Assembled bytes
3403 @ifset COFF-ELF
3404 conventionally
3405 @end ifset
3406 fall into two sections: text and data.
3407 @end ifset
3408 You may have separate groups of
3409 @ifset GENERIC
3410 data in named sections
3411 @end ifset
3412 @ifclear GENERIC
3413 @ifclear aout-bout
3414 data in named sections
3415 @end ifclear
3416 @ifset aout-bout
3417 text or data
3418 @end ifset
3419 @end ifclear
3420 that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3421 are not contiguous in the assembler source. @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3422 use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose. Within each section, there can be
3423 numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192. Objects assembled into the
3424 same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3425 subsection. For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3426 section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3427 assembled. In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3428 section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3429 constants being output.
3430
3431 Subsections are optional. If you do not use subsections, everything
3432 goes in subsection number zero.
3433
3434 @ifset GENERIC
3435 Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3436 (Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3437 of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3438 @end ifset
3439 @ifclear GENERIC
3440 @ifset H8
3441 On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3442 boundary (two bytes).
3443 The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3444 @end ifset
3445 @ifset I960
3446 @c FIXME section padding (alignment)?
3447 @c Rich Pixley says padding here depends on target obj code format; that
3448 @c doesn't seem particularly useful to say without further elaboration,
3449 @c so for now I say nothing about it. If this is a generic BFD issue,
3450 @c these paragraphs might need to vanish from this manual, and be
3451 @c discussed in BFD chapter of binutils (or some such).
3452 @end ifset
3453 @end ifclear
3454
3455 Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3456 to highest. (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3457 The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3458 other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3459 They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3460 data subsections as a data section.
3461
3462 To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3463 into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3464 @var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3465 @ifset COFF
3466 @ifset GENERIC
3467 When generating COFF output, you
3468 @end ifset
3469 @ifclear GENERIC
3470 You
3471 @end ifclear
3472 can also use an extra subsection
3473 argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3474 @var{expression}}.
3475 @end ifset
3476 @ifset ELF
3477 @ifset GENERIC
3478 When generating ELF output, you
3479 @end ifset
3480 @ifclear GENERIC
3481 You
3482 @end ifclear
3483 can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3484 to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3485 @end ifset
3486 @var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3487 (@pxref{Expressions}). If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3488 is assumed. Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}. Assembly
3489 begins in @code{text 0}. For instance:
3490 @smallexample
3491 .text 0 # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3492 .ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3493 .text 1
3494 .ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3495 .data 0
3496 .ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3497 .ascii "in the first data subsection."
3498 .text 0
3499 .ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3500 .ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3501 @end smallexample
3502
3503 Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3504 assembled into that section. Because subsections are merely a convenience
3505 restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3506 counter. There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3507 @code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3508 current value. The location counter of the section where statements are being
3509 assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3510
3511 @node bss
3512 @section bss Section
3513
3514 @cindex bss section
3515 @cindex common variable storage
3516 The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3517 You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3518 not dictate data to load into it before your program executes. When
3519 your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3520 section are zeroed bytes.
3521
3522 The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3523 @ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3524
3525 The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3526 another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3527
3528 @ifset GENERIC
3529 When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3530 COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3531 see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}. You may only assemble zero values into the
3532 section. Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3533 @code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3534 @end ifset
3535
3536 @node Symbols
3537 @chapter Symbols
3538
3539 @cindex symbols
3540 Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3541 things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3542 to debug.
3543
3544 @quotation
3545 @cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3546 @emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3547 the same order they were declared. This may break some debuggers.
3548 @end quotation
3549
3550 @menu
3551 * Labels:: Labels
3552 * Setting Symbols:: Giving Symbols Other Values
3553 * Symbol Names:: Symbol Names
3554 * Dot:: The Special Dot Symbol
3555 * Symbol Attributes:: Symbol Attributes
3556 @end menu
3557
3558 @node Labels
3559 @section Labels
3560
3561 @cindex labels
3562 A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3563 @samp{:}. The symbol then represents the current value of the
3564 active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3565 operand. You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3566 different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3567 definitions.
3568
3569 @ifset HPPA
3570 On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3571 colon, but instead must start in column zero. Only one label may be defined on
3572 a single line. To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3573 provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3574 @end ifset
3575
3576 @node Setting Symbols
3577 @section Giving Symbols Other Values
3578
3579 @cindex assigning values to symbols
3580 @cindex symbol values, assigning
3581 A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3582 by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3583 (@pxref{Expressions}). This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3584 directive. @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}. In the same way, using a double
3585 equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3586 @code{.eqv} directive. @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3587
3588 @ifset Blackfin
3589 Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3590 @end ifset
3591
3592 @node Symbol Names
3593 @section Symbol Names
3594
3595 @cindex symbol names
3596 @cindex names, symbol
3597 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3598 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On most
3599 machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3600 noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. That character may be followed by any
3601 string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3602 particular target machine), and underscores.
3603 @end ifclear
3604 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3605 @ifset H8
3606 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On the
3607 Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names. That
3608 character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3609 on the H8/300), and underscores.
3610 @end ifset
3611 @end ifset
3612
3613 Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3614 than @code{Foo}.
3615
3616 Multibyte characters are supported. To generate a symbol name containing
3617 multibyte characters enclose it within double quotes and use escape codes. cf
3618 @xref{Strings}. Generating a multibyte symbol name from a label is not
3619 currently supported.
3620
3621 Each symbol has exactly one name. Each name in an assembly language program
3622 refers to exactly one symbol. You may use that symbol name any number of times
3623 in a program.
3624
3625 @subheading Local Symbol Names
3626
3627 @cindex local symbol names
3628 @cindex symbol names, local
3629 A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3630 By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3631 @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3632 set of local label prefixes.
3633 @ifset HPPA
3634 On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3635 @end ifset
3636
3637 Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3638 normally not saved in object files. Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3639 You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols:
3640 @option{-L}}) to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3641
3642 @subheading Local Labels
3643
3644 @cindex local labels
3645 @cindex temporary symbol names
3646 @cindex symbol names, temporary
3647 Local labels help compilers and programmers use names temporarily.
3648 They create symbols which are guaranteed to be unique over the entire scope of
3649 the input source code and which can be referred to by a simple notation.
3650 To define a local label, write a label of the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N}
3651 represents any positive integer). To refer to the most recent previous
3652 definition of that label write @samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when
3653 you defined the label. To refer to the next definition of a local label, write
3654 @samp{@b{N}f}---the @samp{b} stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands
3655 for ``forwards''.
3656
3657 There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3658 too. So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3659 the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3660 defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3661 definition of a specific local label for a forward reference. It is also worth
3662 noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3663 implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3664
3665 Here is an example:
3666
3667 @smallexample
3668 1: branch 1f
3669 2: branch 1b
3670 1: branch 2f
3671 2: branch 1b
3672 @end smallexample
3673
3674 Which is the equivalent of:
3675
3676 @smallexample
3677 label_1: branch label_3
3678 label_2: branch label_1
3679 label_3: branch label_4
3680 label_4: branch label_3
3681 @end smallexample
3682
3683 Local label names are only a notational device. They are immediately
3684 transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3685 The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3686 are optionally emitted to the object file. The names are constructed using
3687 these parts:
3688
3689 @table @code
3690 @item @emph{local label prefix}
3691 All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3692 Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3693 that start with the local label prefix. These labels are
3694 used for symbols you are never intended to see. If you use the
3695 @samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3696 object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3697 you may use them in debugging.
3698
3699 @item @var{number}
3700 This is the number that was used in the local label definition. So if the
3701 label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3702
3703 @item @kbd{C-B}
3704 This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3705 of the same name. The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3706
3707 @item @emph{ordinal number}
3708 This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct. The first definition of
3709 @samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}. The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3710 number @samp{15}, and so on. Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3711 the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3712 @end table
3713
3714 So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3715 the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3716
3717 @subheading Dollar Local Labels
3718 @cindex dollar local symbols
3719
3720 @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of local labels called
3721 dollar labels. These labels go out of scope (i.e., they become undefined) as
3722 soon as a non-local label is defined. Thus they remain valid for only a small
3723 region of the input source code. Normal local labels, by contrast, remain in
3724 scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined by another occurrence of
3725 the same local label.
3726
3727 Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3728 except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3729 @samp{@b{55$:}}.
3730
3731 They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
3732 names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
3733 to distinguish them from ordinary labels. For example, the fifth definition of
3734 @samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
3735
3736 @node Dot
3737 @section The Special Dot Symbol
3738
3739 @cindex dot (symbol)
3740 @cindex @code{.} (symbol)
3741 @cindex current address
3742 @cindex location counter
3743 The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
3744 @command{@value{AS}} is assembling into. Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
3745 .long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
3746 Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
3747 directive.
3748 @ifclear no-space-dir
3749 Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
3750 @samp{.space 4}.
3751 @end ifclear
3752
3753 @node Symbol Attributes
3754 @section Symbol Attributes
3755
3756 @cindex symbol attributes
3757 @cindex attributes, symbol
3758 Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
3759 ``Type''. Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
3760 attributes.
3761 @ifset INTERNALS
3762 The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
3763 @end ifset
3764
3765 If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
3766 all these attributes, and probably won't warn you. This makes the
3767 symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
3768 would want.
3769
3770 @menu
3771 * Symbol Value:: Value
3772 * Symbol Type:: Type
3773 @ifset aout-bout
3774 @ifset GENERIC
3775 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3776 @end ifset
3777 @ifclear GENERIC
3778 @ifclear BOUT
3779 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3780 @end ifclear
3781 @ifset BOUT
3782 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3783 @end ifset
3784 @end ifclear
3785 @end ifset
3786 @ifset COFF
3787 * COFF Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for COFF
3788 @end ifset
3789 @ifset SOM
3790 * SOM Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for SOM
3791 @end ifset
3792 @end menu
3793
3794 @node Symbol Value
3795 @subsection Value
3796
3797 @cindex value of a symbol
3798 @cindex symbol value
3799 The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits. For a symbol which labels a
3800 location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
3801 number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
3802 Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
3803 as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking. Absolute
3804 symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
3805 called absolute.
3806
3807 The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way. If it is
3808 0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
3809 @code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
3810 same program. You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
3811 name without defining it. A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
3812 common declaration. The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
3813 bytes (addresses). The symbol refers to the first address of the
3814 allocated storage.
3815
3816 @node Symbol Type
3817 @subsection Type
3818
3819 @cindex type of a symbol
3820 @cindex symbol type
3821 The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
3822 information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
3823 (optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers. The exact
3824 format depends on the object-code output format in use.
3825
3826 @ifset aout-bout
3827 @ifclear GENERIC
3828 @ifset BOUT
3829 @c The following avoids a "widow" subsection title. @group would be
3830 @c better if it were available outside examples.
3831 @need 1000
3832 @node a.out Symbols
3833 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3834
3835 @cindex @code{b.out} symbol attributes
3836 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{b.out}
3837 These symbol attributes appear only when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for
3838 one of the Berkeley-descended object output formats---@code{a.out} or
3839 @code{b.out}.
3840
3841 @end ifset
3842 @ifclear BOUT
3843 @node a.out Symbols
3844 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3845
3846 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3847 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3848
3849 @end ifclear
3850 @end ifclear
3851 @ifset GENERIC
3852 @node a.out Symbols
3853 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3854
3855 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3856 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3857
3858 @end ifset
3859 @menu
3860 * Symbol Desc:: Descriptor
3861 * Symbol Other:: Other
3862 @end menu
3863
3864 @node Symbol Desc
3865 @subsubsection Descriptor
3866
3867 @cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
3868 This is an arbitrary 16-bit value. You may establish a symbol's
3869 descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
3870 (@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}). A descriptor value means nothing to
3871 @command{@value{AS}}.
3872
3873 @node Symbol Other
3874 @subsubsection Other
3875
3876 @cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
3877 This is an arbitrary 8-bit value. It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
3878 @end ifset
3879
3880 @ifset COFF
3881 @node COFF Symbols
3882 @subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
3883
3884 @cindex COFF symbol attributes
3885 @cindex symbol attributes, COFF
3886
3887 The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
3888 like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
3889 @code{.endef} directives.
3890
3891 @subsubsection Primary Attributes
3892
3893 @cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
3894 The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
3895 respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
3896
3897 @subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
3898
3899 @cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
3900 The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
3901 @code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
3902 table information for COFF.
3903 @end ifset
3904
3905 @ifset SOM
3906 @node SOM Symbols
3907 @subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
3908
3909 @cindex SOM symbol attributes
3910 @cindex symbol attributes, SOM
3911
3912 The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
3913 the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
3914
3915 The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
3916 Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
3917 @code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
3918 @end ifset
3919
3920 @node Expressions
3921 @chapter Expressions
3922
3923 @cindex expressions
3924 @cindex addresses
3925 @cindex numeric values
3926 An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
3927 Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
3928
3929 The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
3930 a particular section. If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
3931 enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
3932 section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
3933 the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
3934 @command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
3935
3936 @menu
3937 * Empty Exprs:: Empty Expressions
3938 * Integer Exprs:: Integer Expressions
3939 @end menu
3940
3941 @node Empty Exprs
3942 @section Empty Expressions
3943
3944 @cindex empty expressions
3945 @cindex expressions, empty
3946 An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
3947 Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
3948 expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0. This
3949 is compatible with other assemblers.
3950
3951 @node Integer Exprs
3952 @section Integer Expressions
3953
3954 @cindex integer expressions
3955 @cindex expressions, integer
3956 An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
3957 by @emph{operators}.
3958
3959 @menu
3960 * Arguments:: Arguments
3961 * Operators:: Operators
3962 * Prefix Ops:: Prefix Operators
3963 * Infix Ops:: Infix Operators
3964 @end menu
3965
3966 @node Arguments
3967 @subsection Arguments
3968
3969 @cindex expression arguments
3970 @cindex arguments in expressions
3971 @cindex operands in expressions
3972 @cindex arithmetic operands
3973 @dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions. In other
3974 contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''. In
3975 this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
3976 the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
3977 expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
3978 instruction operands.
3979
3980 Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
3981 @var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
3982 or undefined. @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
3983 integer.
3984
3985 Numbers are usually integers.
3986
3987 A number can be a flonum or bignum. In this case, you are warned
3988 that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
3989 these 32 bits are an integer. You may write integer-manipulating
3990 instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
3991 assemblers.
3992
3993 @cindex subexpressions
3994 Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
3995 expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
3996 operator followed by an argument.
3997
3998 @node Operators
3999 @subsection Operators
4000
4001 @cindex operators, in expressions
4002 @cindex arithmetic functions
4003 @cindex functions, in expressions
4004 @dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}. Prefix
4005 operators are followed by an argument. Infix operators appear
4006 between their arguments. Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
4007 whitespace.
4008
4009 @node Prefix Ops
4010 @subsection Prefix Operator
4011
4012 @cindex prefix operators
4013 @command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}. They each take
4014 one argument, which must be absolute.
4015
4016 @c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
4017 @c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
4018 @c section (which is inside an enumerate).
4019 @tex
4020 \global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
4021 @end tex
4022
4023 @table @code
4024 @item -
4025 @dfn{Negation}. Two's complement negation.
4026 @item ~
4027 @dfn{Complementation}. Bitwise not.
4028 @end table
4029
4030 @tex
4031 \global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
4032 @end tex
4033
4034 @node Infix Ops
4035 @subsection Infix Operators
4036
4037 @cindex infix operators
4038 @cindex operators, permitted arguments
4039 @dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side. Operators
4040 have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
4041 to right. Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
4042 absolute, and the result is absolute.
4043
4044 @enumerate
4045 @cindex operator precedence
4046 @cindex precedence of operators
4047
4048 @item
4049 Highest Precedence
4050
4051 @table @code
4052 @item *
4053 @dfn{Multiplication}.
4054
4055 @item /
4056 @dfn{Division}. Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
4057
4058 @item %
4059 @dfn{Remainder}.
4060
4061 @item <<
4062 @dfn{Shift Left}. Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
4063
4064 @item >>
4065 @dfn{Shift Right}. Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
4066 @end table
4067
4068 @item
4069 Intermediate precedence
4070
4071 @table @code
4072 @item |
4073
4074 @dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
4075
4076 @item &
4077 @dfn{Bitwise And}.
4078
4079 @item ^
4080 @dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
4081
4082 @item !
4083 @dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
4084 @end table
4085
4086 @item
4087 Low Precedence
4088
4089 @table @code
4090 @cindex addition, permitted arguments
4091 @cindex plus, permitted arguments
4092 @cindex arguments for addition
4093 @item +
4094 @dfn{Addition}. If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
4095 the other argument. You may not add together arguments from different
4096 sections.
4097
4098 @cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
4099 @cindex minus, permitted arguments
4100 @cindex arguments for subtraction
4101 @item -
4102 @dfn{Subtraction}. If the right argument is absolute, the
4103 result has the section of the left argument.
4104 If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
4105 You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
4106 @c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
4107
4108 @cindex comparison expressions
4109 @cindex expressions, comparison
4110 @item ==
4111 @dfn{Is Equal To}
4112 @item <>
4113 @itemx !=
4114 @dfn{Is Not Equal To}
4115 @item <
4116 @dfn{Is Less Than}
4117 @item >
4118 @dfn{Is Greater Than}
4119 @item >=
4120 @dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
4121 @item <=
4122 @dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
4123
4124 The comparison operators can be used as infix operators. A true results has a
4125 value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0. Note, these operators
4126 perform signed comparisons.
4127 @end table
4128
4129 @item Lowest Precedence
4130
4131 @table @code
4132 @item &&
4133 @dfn{Logical And}.
4134
4135 @item ||
4136 @dfn{Logical Or}.
4137
4138 These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
4139 expressions. Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
4140 value of 1 but a false results does still return 0. Also note that the logical
4141 or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
4142
4143 @end table
4144 @end enumerate
4145
4146 In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
4147 address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
4148
4149 @node Pseudo Ops
4150 @chapter Assembler Directives
4151
4152 @cindex directives, machine independent
4153 @cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
4154 @cindex machine independent directives
4155 All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
4156 The rest of the name is letters, usually in lower case.
4157
4158 This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
4159 target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
4160 @ifset GENERIC
4161 Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
4162 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4163 @end ifset
4164 @ifclear GENERIC
4165 @ifset machine-directives
4166 @xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
4167 @end ifset
4168 @end ifclear
4169
4170 @menu
4171 * Abort:: @code{.abort}
4172 @ifset COFF
4173 * ABORT (COFF):: @code{.ABORT}
4174 @end ifset
4175
4176 * Align:: @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4177 * Altmacro:: @code{.altmacro}
4178 * Ascii:: @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4179 * Asciz:: @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4180 * Balign:: @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4181 * Bundle directives:: @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, @code{.bundle_lock}, @code{.bundle_unlock}
4182 * Byte:: @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4183 * CFI directives:: @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
4184 * Comm:: @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4185 * Data:: @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4186 @ifset COFF
4187 * Def:: @code{.def @var{name}}
4188 @end ifset
4189 @ifset aout-bout
4190 * Desc:: @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4191 @end ifset
4192 @ifset COFF
4193 * Dim:: @code{.dim}
4194 @end ifset
4195
4196 * Double:: @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4197 * Eject:: @code{.eject}
4198 * Else:: @code{.else}
4199 * Elseif:: @code{.elseif}
4200 * End:: @code{.end}
4201 @ifset COFF
4202 * Endef:: @code{.endef}
4203 @end ifset
4204
4205 * Endfunc:: @code{.endfunc}
4206 * Endif:: @code{.endif}
4207 * Equ:: @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4208 * Equiv:: @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4209 * Eqv:: @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4210 * Err:: @code{.err}
4211 * Error:: @code{.error @var{string}}
4212 * Exitm:: @code{.exitm}
4213 * Extern:: @code{.extern}
4214 * Fail:: @code{.fail}
4215 * File:: @code{.file}
4216 * Fill:: @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4217 * Float:: @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4218 * Func:: @code{.func}
4219 * Global:: @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4220 @ifset ELF
4221 * Gnu_attribute:: @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4222 * Hidden:: @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4223 @end ifset
4224
4225 * hword:: @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4226 * Ident:: @code{.ident}
4227 * If:: @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4228 * Incbin:: @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4229 * Include:: @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4230 * Int:: @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4231 @ifset ELF
4232 * Internal:: @code{.internal @var{names}}
4233 @end ifset
4234
4235 * Irp:: @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4236 * Irpc:: @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4237 * Lcomm:: @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
4238 * Lflags:: @code{.lflags}
4239 @ifclear no-line-dir
4240 * Line:: @code{.line @var{line-number}}
4241 @end ifclear
4242
4243 * Linkonce:: @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
4244 * List:: @code{.list}
4245 * Ln:: @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
4246 * Loc:: @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
4247 * Loc_mark_labels:: @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
4248 @ifset ELF
4249 * Local:: @code{.local @var{names}}
4250 @end ifset
4251
4252 * Long:: @code{.long @var{expressions}}
4253 @ignore
4254 * Lsym:: @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4255 @end ignore
4256
4257 * Macro:: @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
4258 * MRI:: @code{.mri @var{val}}
4259 * Noaltmacro:: @code{.noaltmacro}
4260 * Nolist:: @code{.nolist}
4261 * Octa:: @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
4262 * Offset:: @code{.offset @var{loc}}
4263 * Org:: @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
4264 * P2align:: @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4265 @ifset ELF
4266 * PopSection:: @code{.popsection}
4267 * Previous:: @code{.previous}
4268 @end ifset
4269
4270 * Print:: @code{.print @var{string}}
4271 @ifset ELF
4272 * Protected:: @code{.protected @var{names}}
4273 @end ifset
4274
4275 * Psize:: @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
4276 * Purgem:: @code{.purgem @var{name}}
4277 @ifset ELF
4278 * PushSection:: @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
4279 @end ifset
4280
4281 * Quad:: @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
4282 * Reloc:: @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
4283 * Rept:: @code{.rept @var{count}}
4284 * Sbttl:: @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
4285 @ifset COFF
4286 * Scl:: @code{.scl @var{class}}
4287 @end ifset
4288 @ifset COFF-ELF
4289 * Section:: @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
4290 @end ifset
4291
4292 * Set:: @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4293 * Short:: @code{.short @var{expressions}}
4294 * Single:: @code{.single @var{flonums}}
4295 @ifset COFF-ELF
4296 * Size:: @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
4297 @end ifset
4298 @ifclear no-space-dir
4299 * Skip:: @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4300 @end ifclear
4301
4302 * Sleb128:: @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
4303 @ifclear no-space-dir
4304 * Space:: @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4305 @end ifclear
4306 @ifset have-stabs
4307 * Stab:: @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
4308 @end ifset
4309
4310 * String:: @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
4311 * Struct:: @code{.struct @var{expression}}
4312 @ifset ELF
4313 * SubSection:: @code{.subsection}
4314 * Symver:: @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}}
4315 @end ifset
4316
4317 @ifset COFF
4318 * Tag:: @code{.tag @var{structname}}
4319 @end ifset
4320
4321 * Text:: @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4322 * Title:: @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4323 @ifset COFF-ELF
4324 * Type:: @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4325 @end ifset
4326
4327 * Uleb128:: @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4328 @ifset COFF
4329 * Val:: @code{.val @var{addr}}
4330 @end ifset
4331
4332 @ifset ELF
4333 * Version:: @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4334 * VTableEntry:: @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4335 * VTableInherit:: @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4336 @end ifset
4337
4338 * Warning:: @code{.warning @var{string}}
4339 * Weak:: @code{.weak @var{names}}
4340 * Weakref:: @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4341 * Word:: @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4342 * Deprecated:: Deprecated Directives
4343 @end menu
4344
4345 @node Abort
4346 @section @code{.abort}
4347
4348 @cindex @code{abort} directive
4349 @cindex stopping the assembly
4350 This directive stops the assembly immediately. It is for
4351 compatibility with other assemblers. The original idea was that the
4352 assembly language source would be piped into the assembler. If the sender
4353 of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4354 quit also. One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4355
4356 @ifset COFF
4357 @node ABORT (COFF)
4358 @section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4359
4360 @cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4361 When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4362 synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4363
4364 @ifset BOUT
4365 When producing @code{b.out} output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive,
4366 but ignores it.
4367 @end ifset
4368 @end ifset
4369
4370 @node Align
4371 @section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4372
4373 @cindex padding the location counter
4374 @cindex @code{align} directive
4375 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4376 boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4377 required, as described below.
4378
4379 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4380 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4381 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4382 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4383 with no-op instructions.
4384
4385 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4386 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4387 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4388 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4389 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4390 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4391 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4392
4393 The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4394 For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, i860, iq2000, m68k, or1k,
4395 s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
4396 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4397 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4398 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. For the tic54x, the
4399 first expression is the alignment request in words.
4400
4401 For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4402 strongarm, it is the
4403 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4404 advancement. For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4405 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
4406 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4407
4408 This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4409 native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4410 GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4411 described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4412 architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4413
4414 @node Altmacro
4415 @section @code{.altmacro}
4416 Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4417
4418 @ftable @code
4419 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4420 One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available. It is used to
4421 generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4422 replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion. The
4423 replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4424 separate macro expansion. @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4425 define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4426
4427 @item String delimiters
4428 You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4429 @code{"@var{string}"}:
4430
4431 @table @code
4432 @item '@var{string}'
4433 You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4434
4435 @item <@var{string}>
4436 You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4437 @end table
4438
4439 @item single-character string escape
4440 To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4441 character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4442 character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark). For example, you can
4443 write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4444
4445 @item Expression results as strings
4446 You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4447 and use the result as a string.
4448 @end ftable
4449
4450 @node Ascii
4451 @section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4452
4453 @cindex @code{ascii} directive
4454 @cindex string literals
4455 @code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4456 separated by commas. It assembles each string (with no automatic
4457 trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4458
4459 @node Asciz
4460 @section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4461
4462 @cindex @code{asciz} directive
4463 @cindex zero-terminated strings
4464 @cindex null-terminated strings
4465 @code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4466 a zero byte. The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
4467
4468 @node Balign
4469 @section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4470
4471 @cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4472 @cindex @code{balign} directive
4473 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4474 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4475 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4476 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4477 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4478
4479 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4480 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4481 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4482 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4483 with no-op instructions.
4484
4485 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4486 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4487 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4488 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4489 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4490 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4491 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4492
4493 @cindex @code{balignw} directive
4494 @cindex @code{balignl} directive
4495 The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4496 @code{.balign} directive. The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4497 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4498 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.balignw
4499 4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
4500 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4501 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4502 undefined.
4503
4504 @node Bundle directives
4505 @section @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}
4506 @cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive
4507 @cindex bundle
4508 @cindex instruction bundle
4509 @cindex aligned instruction bundle
4510 @code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction
4511 bundle} mode. In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped
4512 into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}. If the argument is zero, this mode is
4513 disabled (which is the default state). If the argument it not zero, it
4514 gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the
4515 @code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}).
4516
4517 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a
4518 certain aligned boundary. A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of
4519 instructions that starts on an aligned boundary. For example, if
4520 @var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned
4521 chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle. When aligned instruction bundle mode is in
4522 effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles. If an
4523 instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of
4524 that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the
4525 end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction
4526 starts in the next bundle. As a corollary, it's an error if any single
4527 instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size.
4528
4529 @section @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4530 @cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive
4531 @cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive
4532 The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives
4533 allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding. These directives
4534 are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable
4535 aligned instruction bundle mode. It's an error if they appear when
4536 @code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last
4537 directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}.
4538
4539 @cindex bundle-locked
4540 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may
4541 appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple
4542 instructions, all within the same bundle. A pair of @code{.bundle_lock}
4543 and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked}
4544 instruction sequence. For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a
4545 sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with
4546 @code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction. That is, the
4547 entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle
4548 boundary. If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the
4549 first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an
4550 aligned bundle boundary. It's an error if the sequence is longer than the
4551 bundle size.
4552
4553 For convenience when using @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4554 inside assembler macros (@pxref{Macro}), bundle-locked sequences may be
4555 nested. That is, a second @code{.bundle_lock} directive before the next
4556 @code{.bundle_unlock} directive has no effect except that it must be
4557 matched by another closing @code{.bundle_unlock} so that there is the
4558 same number of @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives.
4559
4560 @node Byte
4561 @section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4562
4563 @cindex @code{byte} directive
4564 @cindex integers, one byte
4565 @code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4566 Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4567
4568 @node CFI directives
4569 @section @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4570 @cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4571 @code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4572 should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4573 If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4574 if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4575 To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}. The default if this
4576 directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4577
4578 @section @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4579 @cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4580 @code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4581 should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4582 data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4583 @code{.cfi_endproc}.
4584
4585 Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4586 it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4587
4588 @section @code{.cfi_endproc}
4589 @cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4590 @code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4591 unwind entry previously opened by
4592 @code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4593
4594 @section @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4595 @code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4596 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4597 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4598 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4599 a constant or a symbol name. When using indirect encodings,
4600 the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4601 can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4602 The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4603 no personality routine.
4604
4605 @section @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4606 @code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4607 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4608 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4609 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be a constant
4610 or a symbol name. The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4611 no LSDA.
4612
4613 @section @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4614 @code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4615 address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4616
4617 @section @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4618 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4619 now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4620 remains the same.
4621
4622 @section @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4623 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4624 remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4625 absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4626 CFA address.
4627
4628 @section @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4629 Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4630 value that is added/substracted from the previous offset.
4631
4632 @section @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4633 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4634 CFA.
4635
4636 @section @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4637 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4638 the current CFA register. This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4639 using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4640 This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4641 code it's annotating.
4642
4643 @section @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4644 Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4645
4646 @section @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4647 @code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4648 same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4649 instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4650
4651 @section @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4652 From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4653
4654 @section @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4655 Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4656 i.e. no restoration needed.
4657
4658 @section @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4659 First save all current rules for all registers by @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4660 then totally screw them up by subsequent @code{.cfi_*} directives and when
4661 everything is hopelessly bad, use @code{.cfi_restore_state} to restore
4662 the previous saved state.
4663
4664 @section @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
4665 Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
4666 directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
4667
4668 @section @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
4669 Mark current function as signal trampoline.
4670
4671 @section @code{.cfi_window_save}
4672 SPARC register window has been saved.
4673
4674 @section @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
4675 Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info. One
4676 might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
4677 opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
4678
4679 @section @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
4680 The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}. The value of @var{label}
4681 will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
4682 description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
4683
4684 The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
4685 limited to the return address register. Here, it can be useful to
4686 mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
4687 by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
4688 or another register.
4689
4690 @node Comm
4691 @section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4692
4693 @cindex @code{comm} directive
4694 @cindex symbol, common
4695 @code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}. When linking, a
4696 common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
4697 of the same name in another object file. If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
4698 definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
4699 allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory. @var{length} must be an
4700 absolute expression. If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
4701 the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
4702 using the largest size.
4703
4704 @ifset COFF-ELF
4705 When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
4706 an optional third argument. This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
4707 specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
4708 that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
4709 as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
4710 boundary). The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
4711 power of two. If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
4712 common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol. If no
4713 alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
4714 largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
4715 maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
4716 is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
4717 @samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
4718 multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
4719 It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
4720 (@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
4721 @end ifset
4722
4723 @ifset HPPA
4724 The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
4725 @samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
4726 @end ifset
4727
4728 @node Data
4729 @section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4730
4731 @cindex @code{data} directive
4732 @code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
4733 end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
4734 absolute expression). If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
4735 to zero.
4736
4737 @ifset COFF
4738 @node Def
4739 @section @code{.def @var{name}}
4740
4741 @cindex @code{def} directive
4742 @cindex COFF symbols, debugging
4743 @cindex debugging COFF symbols
4744 Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
4745 definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
4746 @ifset BOUT
4747
4748 This directive is only observed when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF
4749 format output; when producing @code{b.out}, @samp{.def} is recognized,
4750 but ignored.
4751 @end ifset
4752 @end ifset
4753
4754 @ifset aout-bout
4755 @node Desc
4756 @section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4757
4758 @cindex @code{desc} directive
4759 @cindex COFF symbol descriptor
4760 @cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
4761 This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
4762 to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
4763
4764 @ifset COFF
4765 The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
4766 configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
4767 object format. For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
4768 it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
4769 @end ifset
4770 @end ifset
4771
4772 @ifset COFF
4773 @node Dim
4774 @section @code{.dim}
4775
4776 @cindex @code{dim} directive
4777 @cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
4778 @cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
4779 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
4780 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
4781 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
4782 @ifset BOUT
4783
4784 @samp{.dim} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
4785 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
4786 ignores it.
4787 @end ifset
4788 @end ifset
4789
4790 @node Double
4791 @section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4792
4793 @cindex @code{double} directive
4794 @cindex floating point numbers (double)
4795 @code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
4796 assembles floating point numbers.
4797 @ifset GENERIC
4798 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
4799 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4800 @end ifset
4801 @ifclear GENERIC
4802 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
4803 On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
4804 in @sc{ieee} format.
4805 @end ifset
4806 @end ifclear
4807
4808 @node Eject
4809 @section @code{.eject}
4810
4811 @cindex @code{eject} directive
4812 @cindex new page, in listings
4813 @cindex page, in listings
4814 @cindex listing control: new page
4815 Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
4816
4817 @node Else
4818 @section @code{.else}
4819
4820 @cindex @code{else} directive
4821 @code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4822 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It marks the beginning of a section
4823 of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
4824 was false.
4825
4826 @node Elseif
4827 @section @code{.elseif}
4828
4829 @cindex @code{elseif} directive
4830 @code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4831 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It is shorthand for beginning a new
4832 @code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
4833
4834 @node End
4835 @section @code{.end}
4836
4837 @cindex @code{end} directive
4838 @code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file. @command{@value{AS}} does not
4839 process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
4840
4841 @ifset COFF
4842 @node Endef
4843 @section @code{.endef}
4844
4845 @cindex @code{endef} directive
4846 This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
4847 @code{.def}.
4848 @ifset BOUT
4849
4850 @samp{.endef} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; if
4851 @command{@value{AS}} is configured to generate @code{b.out}, it accepts this
4852 directive but ignores it.
4853 @end ifset
4854 @end ifset
4855
4856 @node Endfunc
4857 @section @code{.endfunc}
4858 @cindex @code{endfunc} directive
4859 @code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
4860
4861 @node Endif
4862 @section @code{.endif}
4863
4864 @cindex @code{endif} directive
4865 @code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
4866 it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
4867 conditionally. @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
4868
4869 @node Equ
4870 @section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4871
4872 @cindex @code{equ} directive
4873 @cindex assigning values to symbols
4874 @cindex symbols, assigning values to
4875 This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
4876 It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
4877
4878 @ifset HPPA
4879 The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
4880 @samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
4881 @end ifset
4882
4883 @ifset Z80
4884 The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
4885 @samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
4886 On the Z80 it is an eror if @var{symbol} is already defined,
4887 but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
4888 Compare @ref{Equiv}.
4889 @end ifset
4890
4891 @node Equiv
4892 @section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4893 @cindex @code{equiv} directive
4894 The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
4895 the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined. Note a
4896 symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
4897 undefined.
4898
4899 Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
4900 @smallexample
4901 .ifdef SYM
4902 .err
4903 .endif
4904 .equ SYM,VAL
4905 @end smallexample
4906 plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
4907
4908 @node Eqv
4909 @section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4910 @cindex @code{eqv} directive
4911 The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
4912 evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately. Instead each time
4913 the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
4914 value is taken.
4915
4916 @node Err
4917 @section @code{.err}
4918 @cindex @code{err} directive
4919 If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
4920 message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
4921 object file. This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
4922
4923 @node Error
4924 @section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
4925 @cindex error directive
4926
4927 Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
4928 string that will be emitted as the error message. If you don't specify the
4929 message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
4930 @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
4931
4932 @smallexample
4933 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
4934 @end smallexample
4935
4936 @node Exitm
4937 @section @code{.exitm}
4938 Exit early from the current macro definition. @xref{Macro}.
4939
4940 @node Extern
4941 @section @code{.extern}
4942
4943 @cindex @code{extern} directive
4944 @code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
4945 with other assemblers---but it is ignored. @command{@value{AS}} treats
4946 all undefined symbols as external.
4947
4948 @node Fail
4949 @section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
4950
4951 @cindex @code{fail} directive
4952 Generates an error or a warning. If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
4953 or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message. If the value is less
4954 than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message. The message will
4955 include the value of @var{expression}. This can occasionally be useful inside
4956 complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
4957
4958 @node File
4959 @section @code{.file}
4960 @cindex @code{file} directive
4961
4962 @ifclear no-file-dir
4963 There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive. Targets
4964 that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
4965 @code{.file}. Other targets use the default version.
4966
4967 @subheading Default Version
4968
4969 @cindex logical file name
4970 @cindex file name, logical
4971 This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
4972 are about to start a new logical file. The syntax is:
4973
4974 @smallexample
4975 .file @var{string}
4976 @end smallexample
4977
4978 @var{string} is the new file name. In general, the filename is
4979 recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
4980 to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}. This
4981 statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
4982 old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
4983
4984 @subheading DWARF2 Version
4985 @end ifclear
4986
4987 When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
4988 to the @code{.debug_line} file name table. The syntax is:
4989
4990 @smallexample
4991 .file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
4992 @end smallexample
4993
4994 The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
4995 index of the entry in the table. The @var{filename} operand is a C string
4996 literal.
4997
4998 The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
4999 table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
5000 information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
5001 entries will have.
5002
5003 @node Fill
5004 @section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
5005
5006 @cindex @code{fill} directive
5007 @cindex writing patterns in memory
5008 @cindex patterns, writing in memory
5009 @var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
5010 This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes. @var{Repeat}
5011 may be zero or more. @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
5012 more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
5013 other people's assemblers. The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
5014 is taken from an 8-byte number. The highest order 4 bytes are
5015 zero. The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
5016 byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
5017 Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
5018 @var{size} bytes of this number. Again, this bizarre behavior is
5019 compatible with other people's assemblers.
5020
5021 @var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
5022 If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
5023 assumed zero. If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
5024 @var{size} is assumed to be 1.
5025
5026 @node Float
5027 @section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
5028
5029 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
5030 @cindex @code{float} directive
5031 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5032 has the same effect as @code{.single}.
5033 @ifset GENERIC
5034 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5035 @command{@value{AS}} is configured.
5036 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5037 @end ifset
5038 @ifclear GENERIC
5039 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
5040 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
5041 in @sc{ieee} format.
5042 @end ifset
5043 @end ifclear
5044
5045 @node Func
5046 @section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
5047 @cindex @code{func} directive
5048 @code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
5049 is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
5050 Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
5051 @var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
5052 prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
5053 @samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
5054 All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
5055 The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
5056
5057 @node Global
5058 @section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
5059
5060 @cindex @code{global} directive
5061 @cindex symbol, making visible to linker
5062 @code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}. If you define
5063 @var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
5064 other partial programs that are linked with it. Otherwise,
5065 @var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
5066 from another file linked into the same program.
5067
5068 Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
5069 compatibility with other assemblers.
5070
5071 @ifset HPPA
5072 On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
5073 partial programs. You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
5074 @xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
5075 @end ifset
5076
5077 @ifset ELF
5078 @node Gnu_attribute
5079 @section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
5080 Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file. @xref{Object Attributes}.
5081
5082 @node Hidden
5083 @section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
5084
5085 @cindex @code{hidden} directive
5086 @cindex visibility
5087 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5088 @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
5089 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5090
5091 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5092 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5093 @code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
5094 Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
5095 @end ifset
5096
5097 @node hword
5098 @section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
5099
5100 @cindex @code{hword} directive
5101 @cindex integers, 16-bit
5102 @cindex numbers, 16-bit
5103 @cindex sixteen bit integers
5104 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
5105 a 16 bit number for each.
5106
5107 @ifset GENERIC
5108 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
5109 architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
5110 @end ifset
5111 @ifclear GENERIC
5112 @ifset W32
5113 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
5114 @end ifset
5115 @ifset W16
5116 This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
5117 @end ifset
5118 @end ifclear
5119
5120 @node Ident
5121 @section @code{.ident}
5122
5123 @cindex @code{ident} directive
5124
5125 This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files. The
5126 behavior of this directive varies depending on the target. When using the
5127 a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
5128 source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
5129 for it. When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
5130 @code{.rdata} section, depending on the target. When using ELF, comments are
5131 emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
5132
5133 @node If
5134 @section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
5135
5136 @cindex conditional assembly
5137 @cindex @code{if} directive
5138 @code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
5139 considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
5140 (which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero. The end of
5141 the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
5142 (@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
5143 alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
5144 If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
5145 nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
5146
5147 The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
5148 @table @code
5149 @cindex @code{ifdef} directive
5150 @item .ifdef @var{symbol}
5151 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5152 has been defined. Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
5153 is considered to be undefined.
5154
5155 @cindex @code{ifb} directive
5156 @item .ifb @var{text}
5157 Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
5158
5159 @cindex @code{ifc} directive
5160 @item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
5161 Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same. The
5162 strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes. If they are not quoted,
5163 the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
5164 end of the line. Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted. The
5165 string comparison is case sensitive.
5166
5167 @cindex @code{ifeq} directive
5168 @item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
5169 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
5170
5171 @cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
5172 @item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
5173 Another form of @code{.ifc}. The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
5174
5175 @cindex @code{ifge} directive
5176 @item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
5177 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
5178 equal to zero.
5179
5180 @cindex @code{ifgt} directive
5181 @item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
5182 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
5183
5184 @cindex @code{ifle} directive
5185 @item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
5186 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
5187 to zero.
5188
5189 @cindex @code{iflt} directive
5190 @item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
5191 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
5192
5193 @cindex @code{ifnb} directive
5194 @item .ifnb @var{text}
5195 Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5196 following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
5197
5198 @cindex @code{ifnc} directive
5199 @item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
5200 Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5201 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5202
5203 @cindex @code{ifndef} directive
5204 @cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
5205 @item .ifndef @var{symbol}
5206 @itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
5207 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5208 has not been defined. Both spelling variants are equivalent. Note a symbol
5209 which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
5210
5211 @cindex @code{ifne} directive
5212 @item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
5213 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
5214 (in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
5215
5216 @cindex @code{ifnes} directive
5217 @item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
5218 Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5219 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5220 @end table
5221
5222 @node Incbin
5223 @section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
5224
5225 @cindex @code{incbin} directive
5226 @cindex binary files, including
5227 The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
5228 location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
5229 option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5230 around @var{file}.
5231
5232 The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
5233 @var{file}. The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
5234 read. Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
5235 responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
5236 after the @code{incbin} directive.
5237
5238 @node Include
5239 @section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
5240
5241 @cindex @code{include} directive
5242 @cindex supporting files, including
5243 @cindex files, including
5244 This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
5245 points in your source program. The code from @var{file} is assembled as
5246 if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
5247 included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues. You
5248 can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
5249 (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5250 around @var{file}.
5251
5252 @node Int
5253 @section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
5254
5255 @cindex @code{int} directive
5256 @cindex integers, 32-bit
5257 Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
5258 For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
5259 expression. The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
5260 of target the assembly is for.
5261
5262 @ifclear GENERIC
5263 @ifset H8
5264 On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
5265 integers. On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
5266 32-bit integers.
5267 @end ifset
5268 @end ifclear
5269
5270 @ifset ELF
5271 @node Internal
5272 @section @code{.internal @var{names}}
5273
5274 @cindex @code{internal} directive
5275 @cindex visibility
5276 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5277 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
5278 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5279
5280 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5281 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5282 @code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
5283 (i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
5284 processing must also be performed upon the symbols as well.
5285 @end ifset
5286
5287 @node Irp
5288 @section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5289
5290 @cindex @code{irp} directive
5291 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5292 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
5293 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
5294 set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled. If no
5295 @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
5296 @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to @var{symbol} within the
5297 sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5298
5299 For example, assembling
5300
5301 @example
5302 .irp param,1,2,3
5303 move d\param,sp@@-
5304 .endr
5305 @end example
5306
5307 is equivalent to assembling
5308
5309 @example
5310 move d1,sp@@-
5311 move d2,sp@@-
5312 move d3,sp@@-
5313 @end example
5314
5315 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
5316
5317 @node Irpc
5318 @section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5319
5320 @cindex @code{irpc} directive
5321 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5322 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
5323 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each character in @var{value},
5324 @var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
5325 assembled. If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
5326 assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to
5327 @var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5328
5329 For example, assembling
5330
5331 @example
5332 .irpc param,123
5333 move d\param,sp@@-
5334 .endr
5335 @end example
5336
5337 is equivalent to assembling
5338
5339 @example
5340 move d1,sp@@-
5341 move d2,sp@@-
5342 move d3,sp@@-
5343 @end example
5344
5345 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
5346 at @xref{Macro}.
5347
5348 @node Lcomm
5349 @section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
5350
5351 @cindex @code{lcomm} directive
5352 @cindex local common symbols
5353 @cindex symbols, local common
5354 Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
5355 denoted by @var{symbol}. The section and value of @var{symbol} are
5356 those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss
5357 section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. @var{Symbol}
5358 is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
5359 not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
5360
5361 @ifset GENERIC
5362 Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}. This
5363 argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
5364 @end ifset
5365
5366 @ifset HPPA
5367 The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5368 @samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5369 @end ifset
5370
5371 @node Lflags
5372 @section @code{.lflags}
5373
5374 @cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
5375 @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5376 assemblers, but ignores it.
5377
5378 @ifclear no-line-dir
5379 @node Line
5380 @section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5381
5382 @cindex @code{line} directive
5383 @cindex logical line number
5384 @ifset aout-bout
5385 Change the logical line number. @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5386 expression. The next line has that logical line number. Therefore any other
5387 statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5388 reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. One day
5389 @command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5390 for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5391 @end ifset
5392
5393 Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5394 @code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5395 when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5396 were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5397 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5398
5399 Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5400 used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5401 debugging.
5402 @end ifclear
5403
5404 @node Linkonce
5405 @section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5406 @cindex COMDAT
5407 @cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5408 @cindex common sections
5409 Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5410 This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5411 but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5412 The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5413 Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5414 unique.
5415
5416 This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5417 writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5418 Executable format used on Windows NT.
5419
5420 The @var{type} argument is optional. If specified, it must be one of the
5421 following strings. For example:
5422 @smallexample
5423 .linkonce same_size
5424 @end smallexample
5425 Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5426
5427 @table @code
5428 @item discard
5429 Silently discard duplicate sections. This is the default.
5430
5431 @item one_only
5432 Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5433
5434 @item same_size
5435 Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5436
5437 @item same_contents
5438 Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5439 @end table
5440
5441 @node List
5442 @section @code{.list}
5443
5444 @cindex @code{list} directive
5445 @cindex listing control, turning on
5446 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5447 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5448 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5449 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5450 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5451
5452 By default, listings are disabled. When you enable them (with the
5453 @samp{-a} command line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5454 the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5455
5456 @node Ln
5457 @section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5458
5459 @cindex @code{ln} directive
5460 @ifclear no-line-dir
5461 @samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5462 @end ifclear
5463 @ifset no-line-dir
5464 Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number. @var{line-number}
5465 must be an absolute expression. The next line has that logical
5466 line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5467 statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5468 line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5469 @ifset BOUT
5470
5471 This directive is accepted, but ignored, when @command{@value{AS}} is
5472 configured for @code{b.out}; its effect is only associated with COFF
5473 output format.
5474 @end ifset
5475 @end ifset
5476
5477 @node Loc
5478 @section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5479 @cindex @code{loc} directive
5480 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5481 the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5482 number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5483 instruction. The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5484 arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5485 the row is added.
5486
5487 The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5488
5489 @table @code
5490 @item basic_block
5491 This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5492 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5493
5494 @item prologue_end
5495 This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5496 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5497
5498 @item epilogue_begin
5499 This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5500 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5501
5502 @item is_stmt @var{value}
5503 This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5504 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5505 either 0 or 1.
5506
5507 @item isa @var{value}
5508 This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5509 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5510
5511 @item discriminator @var{value}
5512 This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5513 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5514
5515 @end table
5516
5517 @node Loc_mark_labels
5518 @section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5519 @cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5520 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5521 the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5522 to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5523 register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5524 The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5525 this function respectively.
5526
5527 @ifset ELF
5528 @node Local
5529 @section @code{.local @var{names}}
5530
5531 @cindex @code{local} directive
5532 This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5533 the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
5534 will not be externally visible. If the symbols do not already exist,
5535 they will be created.
5536
5537 For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
5538 accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
5539 the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
5540 (@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
5541 @end ifset
5542
5543 @node Long
5544 @section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
5545
5546 @cindex @code{long} directive
5547 @code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}. @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
5548
5549 @ignore
5550 @c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
5551 @c what it really ought to do
5552 @node Lsym
5553 @section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5554
5555 @cindex @code{lsym} directive
5556 @cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
5557 @code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
5558 the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
5559 rest of the assembly. This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
5560 the same as the expression value:
5561 @smallexample
5562 @var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
5563 @var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
5564 @var{value} = @var{expression}
5565 @end smallexample
5566 @noindent
5567 The new symbol is not flagged as external.
5568 @end ignore
5569
5570 @node Macro
5571 @section @code{.macro}
5572
5573 @cindex macros
5574 The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
5575 generate assembly output. For example, this definition specifies a macro
5576 @code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
5577
5578 @example
5579 .macro sum from=0, to=5
5580 .long \from
5581 .if \to-\from
5582 sum "(\from+1)",\to
5583 .endif
5584 .endm
5585 @end example
5586
5587 @noindent
5588 With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
5589
5590 @example
5591 .long 0
5592 .long 1
5593 .long 2
5594 .long 3
5595 .long 4
5596 .long 5
5597 @end example
5598
5599 @ftable @code
5600 @item .macro @var{macname}
5601 @itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
5602 @cindex @code{macro} directive
5603 Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}. If your macro
5604 definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
5605 separated by commas or spaces. You can qualify the macro argument to
5606 indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
5607 @samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
5608 (through @samp{:@code{vararg}}). You can supply a default value for any
5609 macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}. You
5610 cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
5611 subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
5612 definitions. For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
5613
5614 @table @code
5615 @item .macro comm
5616 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
5617 arguments.
5618
5619 @item .macro plus1 p, p1
5620 @itemx .macro plus1 p p1
5621 Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
5622 which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
5623 @samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
5624
5625 @item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
5626 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
5627 arguments. The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
5628 After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
5629 @samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
5630 @var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
5631 ,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
5632 @samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
5633
5634 @item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
5635 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
5636 arguments. The first argument must always have a value specified, but
5637 not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
5638 will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
5639
5640 When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
5641 position, or by keyword. For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
5642 @samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
5643
5644 @end table
5645
5646 Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
5647 as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
5648 occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
5649 characters when they occur in a special position. For example, if the colon
5650 (@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
5651 architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
5652 character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
5653 replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
5654 construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
5655 identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution. So for example
5656 this macro definition:
5657
5658 @example
5659 .macro label l
5660 \l:
5661 .endm
5662 @end example
5663
5664 might not work as expected. Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
5665 called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
5666 assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
5667 identifier.
5668
5669 Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
5670 which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names). So
5671 for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
5672 length specifier like this:
5673
5674 @example
5675 .macro opcode base length
5676 \base.\length
5677 .endm
5678 @end example
5679
5680 and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
5681 instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
5682 interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
5683
5684 There are several possible ways around this problem:
5685
5686 @table @code
5687 @item Insert white space
5688 If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
5689 solution. eg:
5690
5691 @example
5692 .macro label l
5693 \l :
5694 .endm
5695 @end example
5696
5697 @item Use @samp{\()}
5698 The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
5699 the following text. eg:
5700
5701 @example
5702 .macro opcode base length
5703 \base\().\length
5704 .endm
5705 @end example
5706
5707 @item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
5708 In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
5709 used as a separator. eg:
5710
5711 @example
5712 .altmacro
5713 .macro label l
5714 l&:
5715 .endm
5716 @end example
5717 @end table
5718
5719 Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
5720 also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
5721 and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
5722
5723 @item .endm
5724 @cindex @code{endm} directive
5725 Mark the end of a macro definition.
5726
5727 @item .exitm
5728 @cindex @code{exitm} directive
5729 Exit early from the current macro definition.
5730
5731 @cindex number of macros executed
5732 @cindex macros, count executed
5733 @item \@@
5734 @command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
5735 executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
5736 output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
5737
5738 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
5739 @emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
5740 macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
5741 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
5742 @end ftable
5743
5744 @node MRI
5745 @section @code{.mri @var{val}}
5746
5747 @cindex @code{mri} directive
5748 @cindex MRI mode, temporarily
5749 If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode. If
5750 @var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode. This change
5751 affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
5752 of the file. @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
5753
5754 @node Noaltmacro
5755 @section @code{.noaltmacro}
5756 Disable alternate macro mode. @xref{Altmacro}.
5757
5758 @node Nolist
5759 @section @code{.nolist}
5760
5761 @cindex @code{nolist} directive
5762 @cindex listing control, turning off
5763 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
5764 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5765 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5766 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5767 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5768
5769 @node Octa
5770 @section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
5771
5772 @c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on i960, others? Or warn?
5773 @cindex @code{octa} directive
5774 @cindex integer, 16-byte
5775 @cindex sixteen byte integer
5776 This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For each
5777 bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
5778
5779 The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
5780 hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
5781
5782 @node Offset
5783 @section @code{.offset @var{loc}}
5784
5785 @cindex @code{offset} directive
5786 Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section. @var{loc} must
5787 be an absolute expression. This directive may be useful for defining
5788 symbols with absolute values. Do not confuse it with the @code{.org}
5789 directive.
5790
5791 @node Org
5792 @section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
5793
5794 @cindex @code{org} directive
5795 @cindex location counter, advancing
5796 @cindex advancing location counter
5797 @cindex current address, advancing
5798 Advance the location counter of the current section to
5799 @var{new-lc}. @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
5800 expression with the same section as the current subsection. That is,
5801 you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
5802 wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored. To be compatible
5803 with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
5804 @command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
5805 is the same as the current subsection.
5806
5807 @code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
5808 unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
5809 backwards.
5810
5811 @c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
5812 @c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
5813 @c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
5814 Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
5815 may not be undefined. If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
5816 a chance to share your improved assembler.
5817
5818 Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
5819 to the start of the subsection. This is compatible with other
5820 people's assemblers.
5821
5822 When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
5823 intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
5824 absolute expression. If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
5825 @var{fill} defaults to zero.
5826
5827 @node P2align
5828 @section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
5829
5830 @cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
5831 @cindex @code{p2align} directive
5832 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
5833 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
5834 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
5835 advancement. For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
5836 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
5837 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
5838
5839 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
5840 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
5841 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
5842 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
5843 with no-op instructions.
5844
5845 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
5846 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
5847 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
5848 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
5849 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
5850 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
5851 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
5852
5853 @cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
5854 @cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
5855 The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
5856 @code{.p2align} directive. The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
5857 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
5858 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.p2alignw
5859 2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
5860 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
5861 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
5862 undefined.
5863
5864 @ifset ELF
5865 @node PopSection
5866 @section @code{.popsection}
5867
5868 @cindex @code{popsection} directive
5869 @cindex Section Stack
5870 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5871 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5872 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
5873 (@pxref{Previous}).
5874
5875 This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
5876 section (and subsection) on the section stack. This section is popped off the
5877 stack.
5878 @end ifset
5879
5880 @ifset ELF
5881 @node Previous
5882 @section @code{.previous}
5883
5884 @cindex @code{previous} directive
5885 @cindex Section Stack
5886 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5887 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5888 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
5889 (@pxref{PopSection}).
5890
5891 This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
5892 referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one. Multiple
5893 @code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
5894 subsections). For example:
5895
5896 @smallexample
5897 .section A
5898 .subsection 1
5899 .word 0x1234
5900 .subsection 2
5901 .word 0x5678
5902 .previous
5903 .word 0x9abc
5904 @end smallexample
5905
5906 Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
5907 section A. Whilst:
5908
5909 @smallexample
5910 .section A
5911 .subsection 1
5912 # Now in section A subsection 1
5913 .word 0x1234
5914 .section B
5915 .subsection 0
5916 # Now in section B subsection 0
5917 .word 0x5678
5918 .subsection 1
5919 # Now in section B subsection 1
5920 .word 0x9abc
5921 .previous
5922 # Now in section B subsection 0
5923 .word 0xdef0
5924 @end smallexample
5925
5926 Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
5927 section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
5928
5929 In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
5930 the top section on the section stack.
5931 @end ifset
5932
5933 @node Print
5934 @section @code{.print @var{string}}
5935
5936 @cindex @code{print} directive
5937 @command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
5938 assembly. You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
5939
5940 @ifset ELF
5941 @node Protected
5942 @section @code{.protected @var{names}}
5943
5944 @cindex @code{protected} directive
5945 @cindex visibility
5946 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5947 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
5948
5949 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5950 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5951 @code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
5952 components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
5953 component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
5954 this.
5955 @end ifset
5956
5957 @node Psize
5958 @section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
5959
5960 @cindex @code{psize} directive
5961 @cindex listing control: paper size
5962 @cindex paper size, for listings
5963 Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
5964 number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
5965
5966 If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
5967 of 60. You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
5968 default width is 200 columns.
5969
5970 @command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
5971 lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
5972 @code{.eject}).
5973
5974 If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
5975 those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
5976
5977 @node Purgem
5978 @section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
5979
5980 @cindex @code{purgem} directive
5981 Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
5982 expanded. @xref{Macro}.
5983
5984 @ifset ELF
5985 @node PushSection
5986 @section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
5987
5988 @cindex @code{pushsection} directive
5989 @cindex Section Stack
5990 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5991 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5992 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
5993 (@pxref{Previous}).
5994
5995 This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
5996 top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
5997 subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
5998 @code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
5999 as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
6000 @end ifset
6001
6002 @node Quad
6003 @section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
6004
6005 @cindex @code{quad} directive
6006 @code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For
6007 each bignum, it emits
6008 @ifclear bignum-16
6009 an 8-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
6010 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
6011 @cindex eight-byte integer
6012 @cindex integer, 8-byte
6013
6014 The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6015 hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
6016 @end ifclear
6017 @ifset bignum-16
6018 a 16-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
6019 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
6020 @cindex sixteen-byte integer
6021 @cindex integer, 16-byte
6022 @end ifset
6023
6024 @node Reloc
6025 @section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
6026
6027 @cindex @code{reloc} directive
6028 Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
6029 @var{expression}. If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
6030 the current section. If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
6031 symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
6032 @var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
6033 absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend. e.g. ELF REL
6034 targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
6035 relocation. This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
6036 section.
6037
6038 @node Rept
6039 @section @code{.rept @var{count}}
6040
6041 @cindex @code{rept} directive
6042 Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
6043 @code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
6044
6045 For example, assembling
6046
6047 @example
6048 .rept 3
6049 .long 0
6050 .endr
6051 @end example
6052
6053 is equivalent to assembling
6054
6055 @example
6056 .long 0
6057 .long 0
6058 .long 0
6059 @end example
6060
6061 @node Sbttl
6062 @section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
6063
6064 @cindex @code{sbttl} directive
6065 @cindex subtitles for listings
6066 @cindex listing control: subtitle
6067 Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
6068 title line) when generating assembly listings.
6069
6070 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6071 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6072
6073 @ifset COFF
6074 @node Scl
6075 @section @code{.scl @var{class}}
6076
6077 @cindex @code{scl} directive
6078 @cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
6079 @cindex COFF symbol storage class
6080 Set the storage-class value for a symbol. This directive may only be
6081 used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. Storage class may flag
6082 whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
6083 symbolic debugging information.
6084 @ifset BOUT
6085
6086 The @samp{.scl} directive is primarily associated with COFF output; when
6087 configured to generate @code{b.out} output format, @command{@value{AS}}
6088 accepts this directive but ignores it.
6089 @end ifset
6090 @end ifset
6091
6092 @ifset COFF-ELF
6093 @node Section
6094 @section @code{.section @var{name}}
6095
6096 @cindex named section
6097 Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
6098 named @var{name}.
6099
6100 This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
6101 named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
6102 with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
6103
6104 @ifset COFF
6105 @ifset ELF
6106 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6107 @subheading COFF Version
6108 @end ifset
6109
6110 @cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
6111 For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
6112 ways:
6113
6114 @smallexample
6115 .section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
6116 .section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
6117 @end smallexample
6118
6119 If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
6120 section. Each flag is a single character. The following flags are recognized:
6121 @table @code
6122 @item b
6123 bss section (uninitialized data)
6124 @item n
6125 section is not loaded
6126 @item w
6127 writable section
6128 @item d
6129 data section
6130 @item e
6131 exclude section from linking
6132 @item r
6133 read-only section
6134 @item x
6135 executable section
6136 @item s
6137 shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
6138 @item a
6139 ignored. (For compatibility with the ELF version)
6140 @item y
6141 section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
6142 @item 0-9
6143 single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
6144 @end table
6145
6146 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6147 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
6148 loaded and writable. Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
6149 from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
6150 will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
6151
6152 If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
6153 taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
6154 @end ifset
6155
6156 @ifset ELF
6157 @ifset COFF
6158 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6159 @subheading ELF Version
6160 @end ifset
6161
6162 @cindex Section Stack
6163 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6164 @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
6165 (@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
6166 @code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
6167
6168 @cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
6169 For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
6170
6171 @smallexample
6172 .section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
6173 @end smallexample
6174
6175 The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
6176 combination of the following characters:
6177 @table @code
6178 @item a
6179 section is allocatable
6180 @item e
6181 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6182 @item w
6183 section is writable
6184 @item x
6185 section is executable
6186 @item M
6187 section is mergeable
6188 @item S
6189 section contains zero terminated strings
6190 @item G
6191 section is a member of a section group
6192 @item T
6193 section is used for thread-local-storage
6194 @item ?
6195 section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
6196 @end table
6197
6198 The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
6199 @table @code
6200 @item @@progbits
6201 section contains data
6202 @item @@nobits
6203 section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
6204 @item @@note
6205 section contains data which is used by things other than the program
6206 @item @@init_array
6207 section contains an array of pointers to init functions
6208 @item @@fini_array
6209 section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
6210 @item @@preinit_array
6211 section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
6212 @end table
6213
6214 Many targets only support the first three section types.
6215
6216 Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
6217 ARM) then another character is used instead. For example the ARM port uses the
6218 @code{%} character.
6219
6220 If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6221 be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
6222
6223 @smallexample
6224 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
6225 @end smallexample
6226
6227 Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
6228 constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
6229 @code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
6230 @var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
6231 the same name, same entity size and same flags. @var{entsize} must be an
6232 absolute expression. For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
6233 which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate. Thus
6234 @code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"}; A reference to the first
6235 @code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
6236
6237 If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6238 be present along with an additional field like this:
6239
6240 @smallexample
6241 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6242 @end smallexample
6243
6244 The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
6245 particular section belongs. The optional linkage field can contain:
6246 @table @code
6247 @item comdat
6248 indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
6249 @item .gnu.linkonce
6250 an alias for comdat
6251 @end table
6252
6253 Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
6254 the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6255
6256 @smallexample
6257 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6258 @end smallexample
6259
6260 If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
6261 @code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
6262 present. Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
6263 this directive. If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
6264 @code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
6265 If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
6266
6267 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6268 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
6269 none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
6270 executable. The section will contain data.
6271
6272 For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
6273 directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
6274
6275 @smallexample
6276 .section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
6277 @end smallexample
6278
6279 Note that the section name is quoted. There may be a sequence of comma
6280 separated flags:
6281 @table @code
6282 @item #alloc
6283 section is allocatable
6284 @item #write
6285 section is writable
6286 @item #execinstr
6287 section is executable
6288 @item #exclude
6289 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6290 @item #tls
6291 section is used for thread local storage
6292 @end table
6293
6294 This directive replaces the current section and subsection. See the
6295 contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
6296 some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
6297 work.
6298 @end ifset
6299 @end ifset
6300
6301 @node Set
6302 @section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
6303
6304 @cindex @code{set} directive
6305 @cindex symbol value, setting
6306 Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. This
6307 changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
6308 @var{expression}. If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
6309 flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
6310
6311 You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly.
6312
6313 If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
6314 file is the last value stored into it.
6315
6316 @ifset Z80
6317 On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use
6318 @samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
6319 @end ifset
6320
6321 @node Short
6322 @section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
6323
6324 @cindex @code{short} directive
6325 @ifset GENERIC
6326 @code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
6327 @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6328
6329 In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
6330 numbers of different lengths. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6331 @end ifset
6332 @ifclear GENERIC
6333 @ifset W16
6334 @code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6335 @end ifset
6336 @ifset W32
6337 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
6338 a 16 bit number for each.
6339 @end ifset
6340 @end ifclear
6341
6342 @node Single
6343 @section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
6344
6345 @cindex @code{single} directive
6346 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
6347 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
6348 has the same effect as @code{.float}.
6349 @ifset GENERIC
6350 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
6351 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6352 @end ifset
6353 @ifclear GENERIC
6354 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
6355 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
6356 numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
6357 @end ifset
6358 @end ifclear
6359
6360 @ifset COFF-ELF
6361 @node Size
6362 @section @code{.size}
6363
6364 This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
6365
6366 @ifset COFF
6367 @ifset ELF
6368 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6369 @subheading COFF Version
6370 @end ifset
6371
6372 @cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
6373 For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
6374 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6375
6376 @smallexample
6377 .size @var{expression}
6378 @end smallexample
6379
6380 @ifset BOUT
6381 @samp{.size} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
6382 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6383 ignores it.
6384 @end ifset
6385 @end ifset
6386
6387 @ifset ELF
6388 @ifset COFF
6389 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6390 @subheading ELF Version
6391 @end ifset
6392
6393 @cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
6394 For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
6395
6396 @smallexample
6397 .size @var{name} , @var{expression}
6398 @end smallexample
6399
6400 This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
6401 The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
6402 arithmetic. This directive is typically used to set the size of function
6403 symbols.
6404 @end ifset
6405 @end ifset
6406
6407 @ifclear no-space-dir
6408 @node Skip
6409 @section @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6410
6411 @cindex @code{skip} directive
6412 @cindex filling memory
6413 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6414 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma and
6415 @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same as
6416 @samp{.space}.
6417 @end ifclear
6418
6419 @node Sleb128
6420 @section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
6421
6422 @cindex @code{sleb128} directive
6423 @var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.'' This is a
6424 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6425 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
6426
6427 @ifclear no-space-dir
6428 @node Space
6429 @section @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6430
6431 @cindex @code{space} directive
6432 @cindex filling memory
6433 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6434 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma
6435 and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same
6436 as @samp{.skip}.
6437
6438 @ifset HPPA
6439 @quotation
6440 @emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
6441 targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute. See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
6442 Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
6443 @code{.space} directive. @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
6444 for a summary.
6445 @end quotation
6446 @end ifset
6447 @end ifclear
6448
6449 @ifset have-stabs
6450 @node Stab
6451 @section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
6452
6453 @cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
6454 @cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
6455 There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
6456 All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
6457 The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
6458 cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
6459 Up to five fields are required:
6460
6461 @table @var
6462 @item string
6463 This is the symbol's name. It may contain any character except
6464 @samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names. Some
6465 debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
6466 using this field.
6467
6468 @item type
6469 An absolute expression. The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
6470 this expression. Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
6471 and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
6472
6473 @item other
6474 An absolute expression. The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
6475 low 8 bits of this expression.
6476
6477 @item desc
6478 An absolute expression. The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
6479 bits of this expression.
6480
6481 @item value
6482 An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
6483 @end table
6484
6485 If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
6486 or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
6487 you get a half-formed symbol in your object file. This is
6488 compatible with earlier assemblers!
6489
6490 @table @code
6491 @cindex @code{stabd} directive
6492 @item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
6493
6494 The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
6495 It is a null pointer, for compatibility. Older assemblers used a
6496 null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
6497 strings.
6498
6499 The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
6500 relocatably. When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
6501 is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
6502 assembled.
6503
6504 @cindex @code{stabn} directive
6505 @item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6506 The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
6507
6508 @cindex @code{stabs} directive
6509 @item .stabs @var{string} , @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6510 All five fields are specified.
6511 @end table
6512 @end ifset
6513 @c end have-stabs
6514
6515 @node String
6516 @section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
6517 "@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
6518
6519 @cindex string, copying to object file
6520 @cindex string8, copying to object file
6521 @cindex string16, copying to object file
6522 @cindex string32, copying to object file
6523 @cindex string64, copying to object file
6524 @cindex @code{string} directive
6525 @cindex @code{string8} directive
6526 @cindex @code{string16} directive
6527 @cindex @code{string32} directive
6528 @cindex @code{string64} directive
6529
6530 Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file. You may specify more than
6531 one string to copy, separated by commas. Unless otherwise specified for a
6532 particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
6533 You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
6534
6535 The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
6536 the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
6537 copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively. The expanded characters
6538 are stored in target endianness byte order.
6539
6540 Example:
6541 @smallexample
6542 .string32 "BYE"
6543 expands to:
6544 .string "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0" /* On little endian targets. */
6545 .string "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E" /* On big endian targets. */
6546 @end smallexample
6547
6548
6549 @node Struct
6550 @section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
6551
6552 @cindex @code{struct} directive
6553 Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
6554 which must be an absolute expression. You might use this as follows:
6555 @smallexample
6556 .struct 0
6557 field1:
6558 .struct field1 + 4
6559 field2:
6560 .struct field2 + 4
6561 field3:
6562 @end smallexample
6563 This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
6564 @code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
6565 value 8. Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
6566 use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
6567 before further assembly.
6568
6569 @ifset ELF
6570 @node SubSection
6571 @section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
6572
6573 @cindex @code{subsection} directive
6574 @cindex Section Stack
6575 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6576 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
6577 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6578 (@pxref{Previous}).
6579
6580 This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}. The current
6581 section is not changed. The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
6582 in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
6583 @end ifset
6584
6585 @ifset ELF
6586 @node Symver
6587 @section @code{.symver}
6588 @cindex @code{symver} directive
6589 @cindex symbol versioning
6590 @cindex versions of symbols
6591 Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
6592 within a source file. This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
6593 typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
6594 There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
6595 into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
6596 shared library.
6597
6598 For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
6599 @smallexample
6600 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}
6601 @end smallexample
6602 If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
6603 being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
6604 alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
6605 just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
6606 permitted in symbol names. The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
6607 of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced. The name @var{name}
6608 itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
6609 have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
6610 file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
6611 function is being mentioned. The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
6612 the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
6613 building a shared library. If you are attempting to override a versioned
6614 symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
6615 nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
6616
6617 If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
6618 references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}. If no
6619 reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
6620 symbol table.
6621
6622 Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6623 @smallexample
6624 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
6625 @end smallexample
6626 In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
6627 the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
6628 difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
6629 references to @var{name2} by the linker.
6630
6631 The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6632 @smallexample
6633 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
6634 @end smallexample
6635 When @var{name} is not defined within the
6636 file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
6637 @var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
6638 name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
6639 @end ifset
6640
6641 @ifset COFF
6642 @node Tag
6643 @section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
6644
6645 @cindex COFF structure debugging
6646 @cindex structure debugging, COFF
6647 @cindex @code{tag} directive
6648 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
6649 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
6650 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. Tags are used to link structure
6651 definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
6652 @ifset BOUT
6653
6654 @samp{.tag} is only used when generating COFF format output; when
6655 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6656 ignores it.
6657 @end ifset
6658 @end ifset
6659
6660 @node Text
6661 @section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
6662
6663 @cindex @code{text} directive
6664 Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
6665 the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
6666 expression. If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
6667 is used.
6668
6669 @node Title
6670 @section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
6671
6672 @cindex @code{title} directive
6673 @cindex listing control: title line
6674 Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
6675 source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
6676
6677 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6678 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6679
6680 @ifset COFF-ELF
6681 @node Type
6682 @section @code{.type}
6683
6684 This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
6685
6686 @ifset COFF
6687 @ifset ELF
6688 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6689 @subheading COFF Version
6690 @end ifset
6691
6692 @cindex COFF symbol type
6693 @cindex symbol type, COFF
6694 @cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
6695 For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
6696 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6697
6698 @smallexample
6699 .type @var{int}
6700 @end smallexample
6701
6702 This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
6703 entry.
6704
6705 @ifset BOUT
6706 @samp{.type} is associated only with COFF format output; when
6707 @command{@value{AS}} is configured for @code{b.out} output, it accepts this
6708 directive but ignores it.
6709 @end ifset
6710 @end ifset
6711
6712 @ifset ELF
6713 @ifset COFF
6714 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6715 @subheading ELF Version
6716 @end ifset
6717
6718 @cindex ELF symbol type
6719 @cindex symbol type, ELF
6720 @cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
6721 For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
6722
6723 @smallexample
6724 .type @var{name} , @var{type description}
6725 @end smallexample
6726
6727 This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
6728 function symbol or an object symbol. There are five different syntaxes
6729 supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
6730 compatibility with various other assemblers.
6731
6732 Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
6733 @samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
6734 below do not work on all architectures. The first variant will be accepted by
6735 the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
6736 maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
6737 assemblers.
6738
6739 The syntaxes supported are:
6740
6741 @smallexample
6742 .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
6743 .type <name>,#<type>
6744 .type <name>,@@<type>
6745 .type <name>,%<type>
6746 .type <name>,"<type>"
6747 @end smallexample
6748
6749 The types supported are:
6750
6751 @table @gcctabopt
6752 @item STT_FUNC
6753 @itemx function
6754 Mark the symbol as being a function name.
6755
6756 @item STT_GNU_IFUNC
6757 @itemx gnu_indirect_function
6758 Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
6759 processing. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
6760
6761 @item STT_OBJECT
6762 @itemx object
6763 Mark the symbol as being a data object.
6764
6765 @item STT_TLS
6766 @itemx tls_object
6767 Mark the symbol as being a thead-local data object.
6768
6769 @item STT_COMMON
6770 @itemx common
6771 Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
6772
6773 @item STT_NOTYPE
6774 @itemx notype
6775 Does not mark the symbol in any way. It is supported just for completeness.
6776
6777 @item gnu_unique_object
6778 Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object. The dynamic linker
6779 will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
6780 name and type in use. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU
6781 systems).
6782
6783 @end table
6784
6785 Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
6786
6787 @end ifset
6788 @end ifset
6789
6790 @node Uleb128
6791 @section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
6792
6793 @cindex @code{uleb128} directive
6794 @var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.'' This is a
6795 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6796 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
6797
6798 @ifset COFF
6799 @node Val
6800 @section @code{.val @var{addr}}
6801
6802 @cindex @code{val} directive
6803 @cindex COFF value attribute
6804 @cindex value attribute, COFF
6805 This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
6806 records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
6807 entry.
6808 @ifset BOUT
6809
6810 @samp{.val} is used only for COFF output; when @command{@value{AS}} is
6811 configured for @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but ignores it.
6812 @end ifset
6813 @end ifset
6814
6815 @ifset ELF
6816 @node Version
6817 @section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
6818
6819 @cindex @code{version} directive
6820 This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
6821 formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note's name is set to @code{string}.
6822 @end ifset
6823
6824 @ifset ELF
6825 @node VTableEntry
6826 @section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
6827
6828 @cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
6829 This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
6830 @code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
6831
6832 @node VTableInherit
6833 @section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
6834
6835 @cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
6836 This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
6837 @code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
6838 parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol. As a special case the
6839 parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
6840 @end ifset
6841
6842 @node Warning
6843 @section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
6844 @cindex warning directive
6845 Similar to the directive @code{.error}
6846 (@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
6847
6848 @node Weak
6849 @section @code{.weak @var{names}}
6850
6851 @cindex @code{weak} directive
6852 This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6853 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6854
6855 On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension. This
6856 directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6857 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6858
6859 On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
6860 When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
6861 alternate symbol to hold the default value.
6862
6863 @node Weakref
6864 @section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
6865
6866 @cindex @code{weakref} directive
6867 This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
6868 be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
6869 If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
6870 will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
6871 symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
6872
6873 The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
6874 assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
6875 symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
6876 resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
6877 had the references to the alias removed.
6878
6879 The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
6880 within the assembler.
6881
6882 @node Word
6883 @section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
6884
6885 @cindex @code{word} directive
6886 This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
6887 separated by commas.
6888 @ifclear GENERIC
6889 @ifset W32
6890 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
6891 @end ifset
6892 @ifset W16
6893 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
6894 @end ifset
6895 @end ifclear
6896 @ifset GENERIC
6897
6898 The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
6899 depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
6900 @end ifset
6901
6902 @c on amd29k, i960, sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
6903 @c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
6904 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
6905 @cindex difference tables altered
6906 @cindex altered difference tables
6907 @quotation
6908 @emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
6909 @end quotation
6910
6911 @ifset GENERIC
6912 Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
6913 addressing, require the following special treatment. If the machine of
6914 interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
6915 @pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
6916
6917 @end ifset
6918 In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
6919 @command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
6920 Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
6921 compilers as part of jump tables. Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
6922 directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
6923 @code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
6924 creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
6925 This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
6926 first byte after the secondary table. This short-jump prevents the flow
6927 of control from accidentally falling into the new table. Inside the
6928 table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}. The original @samp{.word}
6929 contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
6930 @code{sym2}.
6931
6932 If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
6933 secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted. If there was a
6934 @samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
6935 long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
6936 and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
6937 minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
6938 entries in the original jump table as necessary.
6939
6940 @ifset INTERNALS
6941 @emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
6942 @samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
6943 assembly language programmers.
6944 @end ifset
6945 @end ifset
6946 @c end DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
6947
6948 @node Deprecated
6949 @section Deprecated Directives
6950
6951 @cindex deprecated directives
6952 @cindex obsolescent directives
6953 One day these directives won't work.
6954 They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
6955 @table @t
6956 @item .abort
6957 @item .line
6958 @end table
6959
6960 @ifset ELF
6961 @node Object Attributes
6962 @chapter Object Attributes
6963 @cindex object attributes
6964
6965 @command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
6966 into object files for that architecture. But not all object files are alike.
6967 Many architectures support incompatible variations. For instance, floating
6968 point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
6969 requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
6970 passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
6971 hardware floating point unit. Or, if two objects are built for different
6972 generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
6973 newer generation at run-time.
6974
6975 This information is useful during and after linking. At link time,
6976 @command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files. After link
6977 time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
6978 correctly.
6979
6980 Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes. Each
6981 attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}. The vendor is a
6982 string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag. The tag is an integer,
6983 and indicates what property the attribute describes. The value may be a string
6984 or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object. Missing
6985 attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
6986
6987 Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
6988 The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
6989
6990 @menu
6991 * GNU Object Attributes:: @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
6992 * Defining New Object Attributes:: Defining New Object Attributes
6993 @end menu
6994
6995 @node GNU Object Attributes
6996 @section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
6997
6998 The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
6999 with vendor @samp{gnu}.
7000
7001 Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
7002 its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
7003 an integer value if the tag number is even. The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
7004 2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
7005 architecture-dependent ones.
7006
7007 @subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
7008
7009 These attributes are valid on all architectures.
7010
7011 @table @r
7012 @item Tag_compatibility (32)
7013 The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name. If
7014 the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains. If it is 1,
7015 then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain. If it is greater
7016 than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
7017 arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
7018 @end table
7019
7020 @subsection MIPS Attributes
7021
7022 @table @r
7023 @item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
7024 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7025
7026 @itemize @bullet
7027 @item
7028 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7029 @item
7030 1 for files using the hardware floating-point with a standard double-precision
7031 FPU.
7032 @item
7033 2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
7034 @item
7035 3 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7036 @item
7037 4 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit wide
7038 double-precision floating-point registers and 32-bit wide general
7039 purpose registers.
7040 @end itemize
7041 @end table
7042
7043 @subsection PowerPC Attributes
7044
7045 @table @r
7046 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
7047 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7048
7049 @itemize @bullet
7050 @item
7051 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7052 @item
7053 1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7054 @item
7055 2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7056 @item
7057 3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7058 @end itemize
7059
7060 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
7061 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7062
7063 @itemize @bullet
7064 @item
7065 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7066 @item
7067 1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
7068 @item
7069 2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
7070 @item
7071 3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
7072 @end itemize
7073 @end table
7074
7075 @node Defining New Object Attributes
7076 @section Defining New Object Attributes
7077
7078 If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
7079 will need to modify. New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
7080 mailing list.
7081
7082 @itemize @bullet
7083 @item
7084 This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
7085 @item
7086 The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
7087 @item
7088 The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
7089 and issue any appropriate link warnings.
7090 @item
7091 Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
7092 @item
7093 @file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
7094 @item
7095 GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
7096 @end itemize
7097
7098 @end ifset
7099
7100 @ifset GENERIC
7101 @node Machine Dependencies
7102 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7103
7104 @cindex machine dependencies
7105 The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
7106 each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs. Floating point representations
7107 vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
7108 directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
7109 assemblers on a particular platform. Finally, some versions of
7110 @command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
7111 optimization.
7112
7113 This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
7114 include details on any machine's instruction set. For details on that
7115 subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
7116
7117 @menu
7118 @ifset AARCH64
7119 * AArch64-Dependent:: AArch64 Dependent Features
7120 @end ifset
7121 @ifset ALPHA
7122 * Alpha-Dependent:: Alpha Dependent Features
7123 @end ifset
7124 @ifset ARC
7125 * ARC-Dependent:: ARC Dependent Features
7126 @end ifset
7127 @ifset ARM
7128 * ARM-Dependent:: ARM Dependent Features
7129 @end ifset
7130 @ifset AVR
7131 * AVR-Dependent:: AVR Dependent Features
7132 @end ifset
7133 @ifset Blackfin
7134 * Blackfin-Dependent:: Blackfin Dependent Features
7135 @end ifset
7136 @ifset CR16
7137 * CR16-Dependent:: CR16 Dependent Features
7138 @end ifset
7139 @ifset CRIS
7140 * CRIS-Dependent:: CRIS Dependent Features
7141 @end ifset
7142 @ifset D10V
7143 * D10V-Dependent:: D10V Dependent Features
7144 @end ifset
7145 @ifset D30V
7146 * D30V-Dependent:: D30V Dependent Features
7147 @end ifset
7148 @ifset EPIPHANY
7149 * Epiphany-Dependent:: EPIPHANY Dependent Features
7150 @end ifset
7151 @ifset H8/300
7152 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7153 @end ifset
7154 @ifset HPPA
7155 * HPPA-Dependent:: HPPA Dependent Features
7156 @end ifset
7157 @ifset I370
7158 * ESA/390-Dependent:: IBM ESA/390 Dependent Features
7159 @end ifset
7160 @ifset I80386
7161 * i386-Dependent:: Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
7162 @end ifset
7163 @ifset I860
7164 * i860-Dependent:: Intel 80860 Dependent Features
7165 @end ifset
7166 @ifset I960
7167 * i960-Dependent:: Intel 80960 Dependent Features
7168 @end ifset
7169 @ifset IA64
7170 * IA-64-Dependent:: Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
7171 @end ifset
7172 @ifset IP2K
7173 * IP2K-Dependent:: IP2K Dependent Features
7174 @end ifset
7175 @ifset LM32
7176 * LM32-Dependent:: LM32 Dependent Features
7177 @end ifset
7178 @ifset M32C
7179 * M32C-Dependent:: M32C Dependent Features
7180 @end ifset
7181 @ifset M32R
7182 * M32R-Dependent:: M32R Dependent Features
7183 @end ifset
7184 @ifset M680X0
7185 * M68K-Dependent:: M680x0 Dependent Features
7186 @end ifset
7187 @ifset M68HC11
7188 * M68HC11-Dependent:: M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
7189 @end ifset
7190 @ifset METAG
7191 * Meta-Dependent :: Meta Dependent Features
7192 @end ifset
7193 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7194 * MicroBlaze-Dependent:: MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
7195 @end ifset
7196 @ifset MIPS
7197 * MIPS-Dependent:: MIPS Dependent Features
7198 @end ifset
7199 @ifset MMIX
7200 * MMIX-Dependent:: MMIX Dependent Features
7201 @end ifset
7202 @ifset MSP430
7203 * MSP430-Dependent:: MSP430 Dependent Features
7204 @end ifset
7205 @ifset NDS32
7206 * NDS32-Dependent:: Andes NDS32 Dependent Features
7207 @end ifset
7208 @ifset NIOSII
7209 * NiosII-Dependent:: Altera Nios II Dependent Features
7210 @end ifset
7211 @ifset NS32K
7212 * NS32K-Dependent:: NS32K Dependent Features
7213 @end ifset
7214 @ifset SH
7215 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
7216 * SH64-Dependent:: SuperH SH64 Dependent Features
7217 @end ifset
7218 @ifset PDP11
7219 * PDP-11-Dependent:: PDP-11 Dependent Features
7220 @end ifset
7221 @ifset PJ
7222 * PJ-Dependent:: picoJava Dependent Features
7223 @end ifset
7224 @ifset PPC
7225 * PPC-Dependent:: PowerPC Dependent Features
7226 @end ifset
7227 @ifset RL78
7228 * RL78-Dependent:: RL78 Dependent Features
7229 @end ifset
7230 @ifset RX
7231 * RX-Dependent:: RX Dependent Features
7232 @end ifset
7233 @ifset S390
7234 * S/390-Dependent:: IBM S/390 Dependent Features
7235 @end ifset
7236 @ifset SCORE
7237 * SCORE-Dependent:: SCORE Dependent Features
7238 @end ifset
7239 @ifset SPARC
7240 * Sparc-Dependent:: SPARC Dependent Features
7241 @end ifset
7242 @ifset TIC54X
7243 * TIC54X-Dependent:: TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
7244 @end ifset
7245 @ifset TIC6X
7246 * TIC6X-Dependent :: TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
7247 @end ifset
7248 @ifset TILEGX
7249 * TILE-Gx-Dependent :: Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
7250 @end ifset
7251 @ifset TILEPRO
7252 * TILEPro-Dependent :: Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
7253 @end ifset
7254 @ifset V850
7255 * V850-Dependent:: V850 Dependent Features
7256 @end ifset
7257 @ifset XGATE
7258 * XGATE-Dependent:: XGATE Features
7259 @end ifset
7260 @ifset XSTORMY16
7261 * XSTORMY16-Dependent:: XStormy16 Dependent Features
7262 @end ifset
7263 @ifset XTENSA
7264 * Xtensa-Dependent:: Xtensa Dependent Features
7265 @end ifset
7266 @ifset Z80
7267 * Z80-Dependent:: Z80 Dependent Features
7268 @end ifset
7269 @ifset Z8000
7270 * Z8000-Dependent:: Z8000 Dependent Features
7271 @end ifset
7272 @ifset VAX
7273 * Vax-Dependent:: VAX Dependent Features
7274 @end ifset
7275 @end menu
7276
7277 @lowersections
7278 @end ifset
7279
7280 @c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
7281 @c in single-cpu versions. This is mainly achieved by @lowersections. There is a
7282 @c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
7283 @c "Machine Dependencies". Hence the conditional nodenames in each
7284 @c major node below. Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
7285 @c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
7286 @c in both conditional blocks.
7287
7288 @ifset AARCH64
7289 @include c-aarch64.texi
7290 @end ifset
7291
7292 @ifset ALPHA
7293 @include c-alpha.texi
7294 @end ifset
7295
7296 @ifset ARC
7297 @include c-arc.texi
7298 @end ifset
7299
7300 @ifset ARM
7301 @include c-arm.texi
7302 @end ifset
7303
7304 @ifset AVR
7305 @include c-avr.texi
7306 @end ifset
7307
7308 @ifset Blackfin
7309 @include c-bfin.texi
7310 @end ifset
7311
7312 @ifset CR16
7313 @include c-cr16.texi
7314 @end ifset
7315
7316 @ifset CRIS
7317 @include c-cris.texi
7318 @end ifset
7319
7320 @ifset Renesas-all
7321 @ifclear GENERIC
7322 @node Machine Dependencies
7323 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7324
7325 The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
7326 and there are also some syntax differences among the families. This
7327 chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
7328 family.
7329
7330 @menu
7331 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7332 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas SH Dependent Features
7333 @end menu
7334 @lowersections
7335 @end ifclear
7336 @end ifset
7337
7338 @ifset D10V
7339 @include c-d10v.texi
7340 @end ifset
7341
7342 @ifset D30V
7343 @include c-d30v.texi
7344 @end ifset
7345
7346 @ifset EPIPHANY
7347 @include c-epiphany.texi
7348 @end ifset
7349
7350 @ifset H8/300
7351 @include c-h8300.texi
7352 @end ifset
7353
7354 @ifset HPPA
7355 @include c-hppa.texi
7356 @end ifset
7357
7358 @ifset I370
7359 @include c-i370.texi
7360 @end ifset
7361
7362 @ifset I80386
7363 @include c-i386.texi
7364 @end ifset
7365
7366 @ifset I860
7367 @include c-i860.texi
7368 @end ifset
7369
7370 @ifset I960
7371 @include c-i960.texi
7372 @end ifset
7373
7374 @ifset IA64
7375 @include c-ia64.texi
7376 @end ifset
7377
7378 @ifset IP2K
7379 @include c-ip2k.texi
7380 @end ifset
7381
7382 @ifset LM32
7383 @include c-lm32.texi
7384 @end ifset
7385
7386 @ifset M32C
7387 @include c-m32c.texi
7388 @end ifset
7389
7390 @ifset M32R
7391 @include c-m32r.texi
7392 @end ifset
7393
7394 @ifset M680X0
7395 @include c-m68k.texi
7396 @end ifset
7397
7398 @ifset M68HC11
7399 @include c-m68hc11.texi
7400 @end ifset
7401
7402 @ifset METAG
7403 @include c-metag.texi
7404 @end ifset
7405
7406 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7407 @include c-microblaze.texi
7408 @end ifset
7409
7410 @ifset MIPS
7411 @include c-mips.texi
7412 @end ifset
7413
7414 @ifset MMIX
7415 @include c-mmix.texi
7416 @end ifset
7417
7418 @ifset MSP430
7419 @include c-msp430.texi
7420 @end ifset
7421
7422 @ifset NDS32
7423 @include c-nds32.texi
7424 @end ifset
7425
7426 @ifset NIOSII
7427 @include c-nios2.texi
7428 @end ifset
7429
7430 @ifset NS32K
7431 @include c-ns32k.texi
7432 @end ifset
7433
7434 @ifset PDP11
7435 @include c-pdp11.texi
7436 @end ifset
7437
7438 @ifset PJ
7439 @include c-pj.texi
7440 @end ifset
7441
7442 @ifset PPC
7443 @include c-ppc.texi
7444 @end ifset
7445
7446 @ifset RL78
7447 @include c-rl78.texi
7448 @end ifset
7449
7450 @ifset RX
7451 @include c-rx.texi
7452 @end ifset
7453
7454 @ifset S390
7455 @include c-s390.texi
7456 @end ifset
7457
7458 @ifset SCORE
7459 @include c-score.texi
7460 @end ifset
7461
7462 @ifset SH
7463 @include c-sh.texi
7464 @include c-sh64.texi
7465 @end ifset
7466
7467 @ifset SPARC
7468 @include c-sparc.texi
7469 @end ifset
7470
7471 @ifset TIC54X
7472 @include c-tic54x.texi
7473 @end ifset
7474
7475 @ifset TIC6X
7476 @include c-tic6x.texi
7477 @end ifset
7478
7479 @ifset TILEGX
7480 @include c-tilegx.texi
7481 @end ifset
7482
7483 @ifset TILEPRO
7484 @include c-tilepro.texi
7485 @end ifset
7486
7487 @ifset Z80
7488 @include c-z80.texi
7489 @end ifset
7490
7491 @ifset Z8000
7492 @include c-z8k.texi
7493 @end ifset
7494
7495 @ifset VAX
7496 @include c-vax.texi
7497 @end ifset
7498
7499 @ifset V850
7500 @include c-v850.texi
7501 @end ifset
7502
7503 @ifset XGATE
7504 @include c-xgate.texi
7505 @end ifset
7506
7507 @ifset XSTORMY16
7508 @include c-xstormy16.texi
7509 @end ifset
7510
7511 @ifset XTENSA
7512 @include c-xtensa.texi
7513 @end ifset
7514
7515 @ifset GENERIC
7516 @c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
7517 @raisesections
7518 @end ifset
7519
7520 @node Reporting Bugs
7521 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7522 @cindex bugs in assembler
7523 @cindex reporting bugs in assembler
7524
7525 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
7526
7527 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
7528 not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
7529 entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
7530 Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
7531
7532 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7533 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7534
7535 @menu
7536 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7537 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7538 @end menu
7539
7540 @node Bug Criteria
7541 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7542 @cindex bug criteria
7543
7544 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7545
7546 @itemize @bullet
7547 @cindex fatal signal
7548 @cindex assembler crash
7549 @cindex crash of assembler
7550 @item
7551 If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7552 @command{@value{AS}} bug. Reliable assemblers never crash.
7553
7554 @cindex error on valid input
7555 @item
7556 If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7557
7558 @cindex invalid input
7559 @item
7560 If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7561 is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
7562 be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
7563
7564 @item
7565 If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
7566 of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
7567 @end itemize
7568
7569 @node Bug Reporting
7570 @section How to Report Bugs
7571 @cindex bug reports
7572 @cindex assembler bugs, reporting
7573
7574 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products. If
7575 you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
7576 contact that organization first.
7577
7578 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7579 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7580 distribution.
7581
7582 @ifset BUGURL
7583 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
7584 to @value{BUGURL}.
7585 @end ifset
7586
7587 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7588 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7589 fact or leave it out, state it!
7590
7591 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
7592 and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might assume that the
7593 name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. Well, probably it does
7594 not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
7595 happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
7596 perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
7597 the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and
7598 give a specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7599 and the most helpful.
7600
7601 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
7602 it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
7603 that the bug has not been reported previously.
7604
7605 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7606 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7607 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7608 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7609
7610 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7611
7612 @itemize @bullet
7613 @item
7614 The version of @command{@value{AS}}. @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
7615 it with the @samp{--version} argument.
7616
7617 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7618 the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
7619
7620 @item
7621 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
7622
7623 @item
7624 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7625 version number.
7626
7627 @item
7628 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
7629 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7630
7631 @item
7632 The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
7633 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
7634 all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
7635
7636 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7637 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7638
7639 @item
7640 A complete input file that will reproduce the bug. If the bug is observed when
7641 the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
7642 high level language source. Most compilers will produce the assembler source
7643 when run with the @samp{-S} option. If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
7644 the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
7645 file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
7646 @command{@value{AS}} is being run.
7647
7648 @item
7649 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7650 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7651
7652 Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
7653 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
7654 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us a chance to
7655 make a mistake.
7656
7657 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
7658 explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
7659 @command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
7660 library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash and ours
7661 would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
7662 would know that the bug was not happening for us. If you had not told us to
7663 expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
7664 observations.
7665
7666 @item
7667 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
7668 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
7669 option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even
7670 discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
7671 by line number.
7672
7673 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7674 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7675 @end itemize
7676
7677 Here are some things that are not necessary:
7678
7679 @itemize @bullet
7680 @item
7681 A description of the envelope of the bug.
7682
7683 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7684 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7685 changes will not affect it.
7686
7687 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7688 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7689 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7690 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7691
7692 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7693 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7694 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7695 less time, and so on.
7696
7697 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7698 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7699
7700 @item
7701 A patch for the bug.
7702
7703 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7704 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7705 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7706 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7707
7708 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
7709 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
7710 the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
7711 one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
7712
7713 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7714 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7715 help us to understand.
7716
7717 @item
7718 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7719
7720 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7721 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7722 @end itemize
7723
7724 @node Acknowledgements
7725 @chapter Acknowledgements
7726
7727 If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
7728 it is not meant as a slight. We just don't know about it. Send mail to the
7729 maintainer, and we'll correct the situation. Currently
7730 @c (October 2012),
7731 the maintainer is Nick Clifton (email address @code{nickc@@redhat.com}).
7732
7733 Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
7734 more details?}
7735
7736 Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
7737 information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
7738 extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
7739
7740 K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
7741 many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
7742 up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
7743 testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
7744 including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
7745 and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
7746 support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
7747 port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
7748 file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
7749 assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
7750
7751 Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
7752 in format-specific I/O modules.
7753
7754 The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan. Eric Youngdale
7755 has done much work with it since.
7756
7757 The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
7758
7759 Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
7760
7761 The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
7762 University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
7763
7764 Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
7765 (@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
7766 (which hasn't been merged in yet). Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
7767 support a.out format.
7768
7769 Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
7770 tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
7771 Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support. Steve also modified the COFF back end to
7772 use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
7773 targets.
7774
7775 John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
7776 simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives. He
7777 updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
7778 fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
7779 remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}). John fixed many bugs, including true tested
7780 cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
7781 required the proverbial one-bit fix.
7782
7783 Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
7784 68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
7785 added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
7786 PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
7787
7788 Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
7789
7790 Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
7791
7792 Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
7793 along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
7794 formats). This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
7795 the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
7796
7797 Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
7798 Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
7799 Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
7800 Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
7801 and some initial 64-bit support).
7802
7803 Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
7804
7805 Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
7806 support for openVMS/Alpha.
7807
7808 Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
7809 flavors.
7810
7811 David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
7812 Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
7813
7814 Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
7815 configuration enhancements.
7816
7817 Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
7818
7819 Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements. If
7820 you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
7821 want to be, let us know. Some of the history has been lost; we are not
7822 intentionally leaving anyone out.
7823
7824 @node GNU Free Documentation License
7825 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
7826 @include fdl.texi
7827
7828 @node AS Index
7829 @unnumbered AS Index
7830
7831 @printindex cp
7832
7833 @bye
7834 @c Local Variables:
7835 @c fill-column: 79
7836 @c End:
This page took 0.219368 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.